Lexmark Printer 131 User Manual

X54x Series  
User's Guide  
November 2012  
Machine type:  
7525  
Model numbers:  
131, 133, 138, 332, 333, 336, 337, 352, 356, 382, 383, 386, 387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
10  
Safety information  
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.  
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of  
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.  
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media  
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or  
incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local  
regulations.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or  
printer damage:  
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.  
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same  
time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.  
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.  
Use only the telecommunications (RJ11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when  
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system  
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.  
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific  
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not  
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not  
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture  
and walls. If the power cord is misused, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly  
for signs of misuse. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety information  
11  
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug  
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or  
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning  
storm.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
12  
Learning about the printer  
Finding information about the printer  
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
Initial setup instructions:  
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came  
with the printer and is also available at  
Connecting the printer  
Installing the printer software  
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:  
Selecting and storing paper and specialty media  
Loading paper  
User'sGuideandQuick Reference Guide—Theguidesmay  
be available on the Software and Documentation CD.  
For more information, visit  
Configuring printer settings  
Viewing and printing documents and photos  
Setting up and using the printer software  
Configuring the printer on a network  
Caring for and maintaining the printer  
Troubleshooting and solving problems  
Instructions for:  
Networking Guide—Open the Software and  
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and  
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From  
the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.  
Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network  
Troubleshooting printer connection problems  
Help using the printer software  
WindowsorMac Help—Openaprintersoftware program  
or application, and then click Help.  
?
Click  
to view contextsensitive information.  
Notes:  
Help is automatically installed with the printer  
software.  
The printer software is located in the printer  
program folder or on the desktop, depending on  
your operating system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about the printer  
13  
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer  
support:  
Lexmark Support Web site—  
Documentation  
Driver downloads  
Live chat support  
Email support  
Voice support  
Note: Select your country or region, and then select  
your product to view the appropriate support site.  
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for  
your country or region can be found on the Support Web  
site or on the printed warranty that came with your  
printer.  
Record the following information (located on the store  
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready  
when you contact customer support so that they may  
serve you faster:  
Machine Type number  
Serial number  
Date purchased  
Store where purchased  
Warranty information  
Warranty information varies by country or region:  
In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty  
included with this printer, or at  
In other countries and regions—See the printed  
warranty that came with your printer.  
Selecting a location for the printer  
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any  
options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:  
Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.  
Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.  
Keep the printer:  
Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators  
Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations  
Clean, dry, and free of dust  
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
14  
31.37 kg  
(69.15 lbs)  
5
1
@
!.  
2
A
BC  
4
GH  
I
3
D
EF  
5
J
KL  
7
PQ  
6
RS  
M
NO  
8
T
UV  
9
W
XY  
*
Z
0
#
1
4
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
102 mm (4 in.)  
508 mm (20 in.)  
152 mm (6 in.)  
76 mm (3 in.)  
254 mm (10 in.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
15  
Printer configurations  
Basic models  
3
3
2
2
3
2
1
1
4
5
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DEF  
4
5
JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9
W
XYZ  
*
0
#
1
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4
GHI  
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
6MNO  
RS  
8TU  
V
9
W
XYZ  
*
0
#
4
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DEF  
5JKL  
8TUV  
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
5
5
6
6
7
8
7
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Printer control panel  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Standard exit bin  
Top door latch  
Right side cover  
Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)  
Manual feeder  
650-sheet duo drawer with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)  
Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)  
Basic functions of the scanner  
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for workgroups. You can:  
Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.  
Send a fax using the printer control panel.  
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.  
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, an FTP server, or a USB flash memory device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about the printer  
16  
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.  
Using the ADF  
The ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex (twosided) pages. When using the ADF:  
Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.  
Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.  
Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF.  
Scan sizes from 125 x 216 mm (4.9 x 8.5 in.) wide to 127 x 356 mm (5 x 14 in.) long.  
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).  
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)  
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Using the scanner glass  
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:  
Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.  
Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) thick.  
Understanding the printer control panel  
Note: Some features are not available on selected printer models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Learning about the printer  
17  
1
2
3
Copy  
Copies  
Fax  
Content  
Darkness  
Text  
Copy  
Menu  
Back  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Stop/Cancel  
Redial/Pause  
@!.  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
1
4
2
3
6
Scan/Email  
Fax  
MNO  
5
8
Scale  
Resolution  
Options  
Hook  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
9
7
Select  
Options  
Start  
Duplex/2-Sided  
Shortcuts  
0
#
*
Black Color  
Item  
Description  
1
Selections and  
settings  
Select a function such as Copy, Scan, Email, or Fax. Change default copy and scan settings such  
as the number of copies, duplex printing, copy options, and scaling. Use the address book when  
scanning to email.  
2
3
Display area  
Keypad area  
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages. Access  
the administration menus, start, stop, or cancel a print job.  
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display, print using the USB flash memory device, or  
change the default fax settings.  
1
2
3
10  
9
4
5
8
7
6
Item  
1
Description  
Copy  
Press the Copy button to enter the copy function.  
2
3
Content  
Copies  
Press the Content button to enhance copy, scan, email, or fax quality. Choose from Text,  
Text/Photo, or Photo.  
Press the Copies button to enter the number of copies to print.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
18  
Item  
4
Description  
Press the Scale button to change the size of the copied document to fit onto the currently selected  
Scale  
paper size.  
5
6
Options  
Press the Options button to change Original Size, Paper Source, Paper Saver, and Collate settings.  
Address Book  
Darkness  
Press  
to enter the address book.  
7
8
9
Press the Darkness button to adjust the current darkness settings.  
Duplex 2-Sided Press the Duplex 2Sided button to scan or print on both sides of the paper.  
Note: The duplex feature is not available on selected printer models.  
Fax  
Press the Fax button to enter the fax function.  
Note: Fax mode is not available on selected printer models.  
10 Scan/Email  
Press the Scan/Email button to enter the scan or scan to email function.  
2
1
3
4
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
19  
Item  
1
Description  
Press to enter the administration menus.  
Menu  
2
3
Display  
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages  
Note: The fax feature is not available on selected printer models.  
Stop/Cancel  
Press  
to stop all printer activity.  
4
5
6
7
Color start  
Black start  
Right arrow  
Select  
Press  
to copy or scan in color.  
Press  
Press  
Press  
to copy or scan in black and white.  
to scroll right.  
to accept menu selections and settings.  
8
9
Left arrow  
Press  
to scroll left.  
Indicator light Indicates the printer status:  
Off—The power is off.  
Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.  
Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.  
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
20  
Item  
10 Back  
Description  
Press to return one screen at a time to the Readyscreen.  
Note: An error beep sounds when you press  
if a flash drive is connected and the USB menu is  
displayed.  
Note: The fax buttons, keypad, and USB port are not available on selected printer models.  
2
1
7
6
3
5
4
Item  
1
Description  
Redial/Pause  
Press the Redial/Pause button to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number.  
In the Fax To: field, a Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).  
From the home screen, press the Redial/Pause button to redial a fax number.  
The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the  
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing the Redial/Pause button causes an error  
beep.  
2
Keypad  
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display.  
@!.  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
1
4
2
5
8
3
6
GHI  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
9
7
0
#
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Learning about the printer  
21  
Item  
Description  
3
Front USB port  
Lets you scan to a flash drive or print supported file types  
Note: When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan  
to the USB device or print files from the USB device. All other printer functions are  
unavailable.  
4
5
Shortcuts  
#
Press  
Press  
to enter the shortcut screen.  
#
Hook  
to take the line offhook (like picking up a phone receiver). Press  
a second time to  
hang up the line.  
6
7
Options  
Press the Options button to change Original Size, Broadcast, Delayed Send, and Cancel settings.  
Resolution  
Press the Resolution button to select a dpi value for the scan.  
Note: Press  
or  
to scroll through the values, and then press  
to enter a value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
22  
Additional printer setup  
Installing internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this  
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.  
Available options  
Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.  
Memory cards  
Printer memory  
Flash memory  
Font cards  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Additional printer setup  
23  
Accessing the system board to install internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Access the system board at the back of the printer.  
2 Turn the screws counterclockwise to remove them.  
3 Gently pull the cover away from the printer, and then remove it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
24  
4 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electrical components are easily damaged by static electricity.  
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1
2
1
2
Flash memory card connector  
Memory card connector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
25  
Installing a memory card  
The system board has one connector for an optional memory card.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Open both latches on the connector completely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
26  
3 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
4 Align the notch on the memory card with the ridge on the connector.  
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place. Make sure each latch fits over the notch  
located on either side of the memory card.  
1
2
Notch  
Ridge  
6 Reinstall the system board access cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
27  
Installing a flash memory card  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board. This ensures the  
metal pins line up correctly as well.  
1
1
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
28  
1
2
Plastic pins  
Metal pins  
4 Push the card firmly into place.  
Notes:  
The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.  
Be careful not to damage the connectors.  
5 Reinstall the system board cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
29  
Installing hardware options  
Installing an optional tray or drawer  
The printer supports two additional input sources: an optional 550sheet tray and a 650sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) with  
an integrated multipurpose feeder.  
Note: Some printer models may not support the optional 550sheet tray.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Unpack the optional 550sheet tray, and then remove all packing material and the dust cover.  
2 Place the tray in the location chosen for the printer.  
Note: If you are installing both the optional tray and the 650sheet duo drawer, the optional 550sheet tray  
must always be installed as the first tray (configuring from the bottom up).  
3 Align a 650sheet duo drawer with the optional 550sheet tray, and then lower it into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional printer setup  
30  
4 Align the printer with the 650sheet duo drawer, and then lower the printer into place.  
1@  
!.  
2ABC  
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JKL  
7PQ  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
RS  
8TUV  
*
0
#
5 Install the dust covers.  
Note: Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in  
the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available options in the  
Attaching cables  
1 Connect the printer to a computer or a network.  
For a local connection, use a USB cable.  
For a network connection, use an Ethernet cable.  
Notes:  
For fax connections, see “Initial fax setup” on page 86.  
Make sure the software is installed before turning the printer on. For more information, see the Setup  
Guide.  
2 Connect the power cord to the printer first and then to a wall outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
31  
1
2
3
1
2
Power cord socket  
Ethernet port  
Note: The Ethernet port is a feature on network models only.  
3
USB port  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
32  
Verifying printer setup  
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up  
correctly by printing the following:  
Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options  
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.  
Remove the option and install it again.  
Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page  
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing  
configuration.  
Printing menu settings pages  
Print menu settings pages to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.  
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings pages list all the factory  
default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings as  
user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,  
and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see “Restoring the factory default settings” on page 206.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reportsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Menu Settings Pageappears, and then press  
.
After the menu settings pages print, Readyappears.  
Printing a network setup page  
If the printer is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also  
provides important information that aids network printing configuration.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reportsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Network Setup Pageappears, and then press  
.
After the network setup page prints, Readyappears.  
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”  
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult  
a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Additional printer setup  
33  
Setting up the printer software  
Installing the printer software  
Notes:  
If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall  
the current software first.  
Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.  
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
2 Doubleclick the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK.  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
In Macintosh  
Click the CD icon on the desktop.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Updating available options in the printer driver  
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make  
them available for use.  
For Windows users  
1 Open the printers folder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Additional printer setup  
34  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:  
Press and hold the printer you want to update.  
Rightclick the printer you want to update.  
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:  
For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.  
For earlier versions, select Properties.  
4 Click the Configuration tab.  
5 Do either of the following:  
Click Update Now Ask Printer.  
Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.  
6 Click Apply.  
For Macintosh users  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver  
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver  
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.  
Setting up wireless printing  
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network  
Notes:  
Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.  
Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.  
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:  
SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.  
Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional printer setup  
35  
Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.  
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are  
not sure which channel to select.  
Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:  
WEP key  
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key  
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.  
WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase  
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set  
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the  
network.  
802.1X–RADIUS  
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:  
Authentication type  
Inner authentication type  
802.1X user name and password  
Certificates  
No security  
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.  
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.  
Notes:  
If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility  
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the  
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact  
your system support person.  
To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that  
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your  
system support person.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)  
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:  
Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.  
The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.  
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
36  
1
@
!.  
2
A
BC  
4
GHI  
3
D
EF  
5
JK  
L
7
PQR  
6
S
M
NO  
8
T
UV  
XYZ  
*
0
#
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.  
2 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
3 Doubleclick the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the  
following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter or click OK.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
4 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.  
6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).  
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
37  
7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.  
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so  
you can print wirelessly.  
8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the  
Networking Guide.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)  
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.  
Prepare to configure the printer  
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.  
1
@
!.  
2
A
BC  
4
GHI  
3
D
EF  
5
JK  
L
7
PQR  
6
S
M
NO  
8
T
UV  
9
W
XYZ  
*
0
#
2 Locate the printer MAC address.  
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:  
> Reports >  
> Network Setup Page >  
or  
> Reports > Network Setup Page  
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).  
Note: You will need this information later.  
Enter the printer information  
1 Access the AirPort options:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Network > WiFi  
System Preferences > Network > AirPort  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
38  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort  
2 From the Network Name popup menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC  
address located on the MAC address sheet.  
3 Open a Web browser.  
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.  
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then doubleclick the printer name.  
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.  
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.  
Configure the printer for wireless access  
1 Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.  
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).  
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.  
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.  
5 Click Submit.  
6 Open the AirPort application on the computer:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Network > WiFi  
System Preferences > Network > AirPort  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort  
7 From the Network popup menu, select the name of the wireless network.  
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly  
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in  
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:  
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
b Doubleclick the installer package for the printer.  
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
39  
d Select a destination, and then click Continue.  
e From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
f Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.  
g Click Close when the installation is complete.  
2 Add the printer:  
a For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Print & Scan  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
2 Click +.  
3 If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.  
4 Click the IP tab.  
5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
2 Doubleclick Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.  
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.  
b For AppleTalk printing:  
Notes:  
Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.  
This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
2 Click +, and then navigate to:  
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
2 Doubleclick Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
3 From the Printer List, click Add.  
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.  
5 From the first popup menu, select AppleTalk.  
6 From the second popup menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.  
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
40  
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network  
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.  
For Windows users  
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.  
From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.  
From our Web site:  
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:  
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system  
2 Doubleclick the software installer package.  
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.  
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the  
following:  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe> OK  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click  
or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.  
c Press Enter or click OK.  
Note: Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >  
Administrator Tools.  
4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.  
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.  
6 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.  
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.  
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.  
2 Obtain the printer IP address either:  
From the printer control panel  
From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional printer setup  
41  
By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section  
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
3 Install the printer driver on the computer.  
a Doubleclick the installer package for the printer.  
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.  
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
e Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.  
f Click Close when the installation is complete.  
4 Add the printer.  
For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Print & Scan  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +.  
c If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.  
d Click the IP tab.  
e Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier  
a From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
b Doubleclick Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
c From the printer list, click Add, and then click IP Printer.  
d Type the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.  
For AppleTalk printing:  
Notes:  
Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.  
This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:  
System Preferences > Print & Fax  
b Click +, and then navigate to:  
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier  
a From the Finder, navigate to:  
Applications > Utilities  
b Doubleclick Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
42  
c From the printer list, click Add.  
d Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.  
e From the first popup menu, select AppleTalk.  
f From the second popup menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.  
g Select the device from the list, and then click Add.  
Note: If the scanner does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more  
information, contact your system support person.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
43  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact  
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide  
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:  
The Notices chapter  
The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle  
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter  
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.  
Saving paper and toner  
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly  
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both  
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.  
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".  
Using recycled paper and other office papers  
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for  
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.  
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that  
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor  
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:  
Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)  
Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)  
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)  
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.  
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)  
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)  
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)  
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves  
through the printer)  
Brightness and texture (look and feel)  
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control  
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one goodpath to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,  
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates  
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource  
management overall.  
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To  
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of  
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
44  
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive  
manufacturing processes required to make paper.  
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is  
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help  
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers  
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.  
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.  
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:  
1 Minimize paper consumption.  
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry  
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications  
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and  
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.  
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,  
or recycled paper.  
Unacceptable paper examples  
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:  
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers  
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper  
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),  
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software  
application to successfully print on these forms.)  
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers  
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)  
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
Multiple part forms or documents  
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found  
at the Environmental Sustainability link.  
Conserving supplies  
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:  
Use both sides of the paper  
If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper  
for a printed document by selecting 2sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.  
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiplepage document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by  
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (NUp) section of the Print dialog screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
45  
Check your first draft for accuracy  
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:  
Use the Lexmark preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar to see what  
the document will look like before you print it.  
Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.  
Avoid paper jams  
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 113.  
Saving energy  
Using EcoMode  
Use EcoMode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.  
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an EcoMode setting.  
Choose  
To  
Energy  
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.  
Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the  
first page is printed.  
The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity.  
Paper  
Duplex is enabled on printer models supporting duplex.  
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.  
Off  
Use factory default settings for all settings associated with EcoMode. This setting supports the performance  
specifications for your printer.  
To select an EcoMode setting:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
.
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settingsappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until EcoModeappears, and then press  
.
.
.
5 Select the setting you want, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears.  
Reducing printer noise  
Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.  
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
46  
Choose  
To  
On  
Reduce printer noise.  
You may notice a reduction in processing speed.  
Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to  
print. You may notice a short delay before the first page  
is printed.  
Fans run at a reduced speed or are turned off.  
If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are  
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax  
speaker and ringer.  
Off  
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the  
performance specifications for your printer.  
To select a Quiet Mode setting:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settingsappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quiet Modeappears, and then press  
.
.
.
.
5 Select the setting you want, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears.  
Adjusting Power Saver  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until General Settingsappears, and then press  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Timeoutappears, and then press  
6 Press the arrow buttons until Power Saverappears, and then press  
.
.
.
.
.
7 Press the arrow buttons to enter the number of minutes for the printer to wait before entering the Power Saver  
mode. Available settings range from 1–240 minutes.  
8 Press  
.
Submitting changesappears.  
9 Press  
, and then press  
until Readyappears.  
Note: Power Saver settings can also be adjusted by typing the printer IP address into the address field of your Web  
browser.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
47  
Recycling  
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,  
see:  
The Notices chapter  
The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle  
Recycling Lexmark products  
To return Lexmark products for recycling:  
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local  
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.  
Recycling Lexmark packaging  
Lexmark continually strives tominimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported  
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These  
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.  
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.  
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your  
area.  
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the  
box.  
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling  
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both  
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent  
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return  
the cartridges are also recycled.  
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and  
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:  
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Loading paper and specialty media  
48  
Loading paper and specialty media  
This section explains how to use the 250-sheet tray, the manual feeder, an optional 550-sheet tray, and the 650-sheet  
duo drawer with an integrated multipurpose feeder. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the  
Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.  
Linking and unlinking trays  
Linking trays  
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next  
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.  
The Paper Size setting for all trays must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set  
for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the  
Paper Size/Type menu.  
Unlinking trays  
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.  
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:  
Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)  
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked  
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.  
Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)  
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings are not automatic; they  
must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper  
loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be  
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.  
Assigning a Custom Type name  
Assign a Custom Type name to a tray to link or unlink it. Associate the same Custom Type name to each tray that you  
want to link. Only trays with the same custom names assigned will link.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Size/Typeappears, and then press  
.
5 Press the arrow buttons, and then press  
to select the tray.  
The Paper Size menu appears.  
6 Press the arrow buttons until the Paper Type menu appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Loading paper and specialty media  
49  
7 Press  
.
8 Press the arrow buttons until Custom Type <x>or another custom name appears, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears, followed by Paper Menu.  
9 Press  
, and then press  
to return to the Readystate.  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type  
Note: Trays with matching Paper Size and Paper Type settings are automatically linked by the printer. When a linked  
tray runs out of paper, the printer draws from another tray.  
To change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menuappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Size/Typeappears, and then press  
5 Press the arrow buttons until the correct tray appears, and then press  
.
.
.
6 Press  
when Sizeappears.  
7 Press the arrow buttons until the correct size appears, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears, followed by Size.  
8 Press the arrow buttons until Typeappears, and then press  
.
9 Press the arrow buttons until the correct type appears, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears, followed by Type.  
10 Press  
, and then press  
to return to the Readystate.  
Configuring Universal paper settings  
The Universal Paper Size is a userdefined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer  
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper  
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:  
Units of measure (inches or millimeters)  
Portrait Height and Portrait Width  
Feed Direction  
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest is 215.9 x 355.6 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.).  
Specify a unit of measurement  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menuappears, and then press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading paper and specialty media  
50  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Universal Setupappears, and then press  
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Units of Measureappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the correct unit of measure appears, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears, followed by the Universal Setupmenu.  
Specify the paper height and width  
Defining a specific height and width measurement for the Universal paper size (in the portrait orientation) allows the  
printer to support the size, including support for standard features such as duplex printing and printing multiple pages  
on one sheet.  
1 From the Universal Setup menu, press the arrow buttons until Portrait Widthor Portrait Height  
appears, and then press  
.
Note: Select Portrait Heightto adjust the paper height setting or Paper Widthto adjust the paper  
width setting.  
2 Press the arrow buttons to decrease or to increase the setting, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears, followed by the Universal Setupmenu.  
Loading the standard 250sheet tray and optional 550sheet  
tray  
The printer has one standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an attached manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-  
sheet duo drawer, and the optional 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same  
way.  
Note: The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
1 Pull the tray out.  
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
51  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GHI  
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
RS  
6MNO  
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
2 Squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being  
loaded.  
Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
52  
3 If the paper is longer than lettersize paper, then push the green tab at the back of the tray to elongate it.  
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the  
edges on a level surface.  
5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.  
6 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper.  
Note: Make sure that the side guides are placed tightly against the edges of the paper so that the image is  
registered properly on the page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
53  
7 Insert the tray.  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9
W
XY  
*
Z
0
#
8 If a different type or size of paper was loaded than the type or size previously loaded in the tray, change the Paper  
Type or Paper Size setting for the tray from the printer control panel.  
Note: Mixing paper sizes or types in a paper tray may lead to jams.  
Loading the 650sheet duo drawer  
The 650sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) consists of a 550sheet tray and an integrated 100sheet multipurpose feeder. The  
drawer is loaded in the same way as the 250sheet tray and the optional 550sheet tray, and supports the same paper  
types and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators, as  
shown in the following illustration:  
Note: The optional 550sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Length guide tabs  
Size indicators  
Width guide tabs  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
54  
Using the multipurpose feeder  
1 Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.  
2 Open the multipurpose feeder.  
3 Grasp the extension, and pull it straight out until it is fully extended.  
4 Prepare the paper for loading.  
Flexsheetsof paper back andforthtoloosenthem, andthenfanthem. Donotfoldorcrease the paper. Straighten  
the edges on a level surface.  
Hold transparencies by the edges and fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Note: Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
55  
Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level  
surface.  
5 Locate the stack height limiter and tab.  
Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.  
2
1
4
3
1
2
3
4
Tab  
Stack height limiter  
Width guide  
Size indicators  
6 Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.  
Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the top edge  
entering first.  
Load envelopes with the flap side up.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or  
selfstick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer..  
Notes:  
Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.  
Load only one size and type of paper at a time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
56  
7 Make sure the paper is as far into the multipurpose feeder as it will go with very gentle pushing. Paper should lie  
flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or  
wrinkled.  
8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.  
Using the manual feeder  
The standard 250sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of paper one  
sheet at a time.  
1 Load a sheet of paper into the manual feeder.  
Printable side facedown for one-sided printing.  
Printable side faceup for twosided (duplex) printing.  
Note: There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on the mode of printing.  
Onesided printing using a letterhead Twosided printing using a letterhead  
C
A B  
Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading paper and specialty media  
57  
2 Feed paper into the manual feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides.  
Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only highquality media designed for laser printers.  
3 Adjust the paper guides to the paper width.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not force the paper into the feeder. Forcing the paper causes jams.  
DE  
F
J
L
6MN  
O
U  
V
9WXY  
Z
#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and specialty media guide  
58  
Paper and specialty media guide  
Additional information for printing on speciality medias may be found in the Cardstock and Label Guide available on  
Paper guidelines  
Paper characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating  
new paper stock.  
Weight  
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than  
75 g/m2 (20 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 80 g/m2 (21 lb  
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 or heavier paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after  
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,  
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding  
problems.  
Smoothness  
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too  
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;  
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.  
Moisture content  
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.  
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that  
can degrade its performance.  
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to  
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different  
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.  
Grain direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of  
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.  
For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, use grain long fibers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper and specialty media guide  
59  
Fiber content  
Most highquality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the  
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing  
fibers such as cotton possesses characteristics that can negatively affect paper handling.  
Unacceptable paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless  
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper  
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),  
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms  
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.  
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
Roughedged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers  
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)  
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
Multiplepart forms or documents  
Selecting paper  
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure troublefree printing.  
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:  
Always use new, undamaged paper.  
Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the  
paper package.  
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.  
Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead  
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:  
Use grain long for 60 to 176 g/m2 weight paper.  
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Use papers printed with heatresistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand  
temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by  
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidationset or oilbased generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.  
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper and specialty media guide  
60  
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Storing paper  
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:  
For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label  
manufacturersrecommendprinting inatemperature range of18to 24°C (65 to75°F)withrelativehumidity between  
40 and 60%.  
Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.  
Store individual packages on a flat surface.  
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights  
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.  
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.  
Paper sizes supported by the printer  
Notes:  
Your printer model may have a 650sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550sheet tray and an integrated  
100sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550sheet tray part of the 650sheet duo drawer supports the same paper  
as the optional 550sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and  
weights.  
The optional 550sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
Paper size  
A4  
Dimensions  
250sheet tray Optional  
Multipurpose  
550sheet tray feeder  
Manual  
feeder  
210 x 297 mm  
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)  
A5  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)  
JIS B5  
A6  
182 x 257 mm  
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)  
105 x 148 mm  
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)  
X
X
X
Statement  
Letter  
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
X
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in.)  
* When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software  
program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper and specialty media guide  
61  
Paper size  
Folio  
Dimensions  
250sheet tray Optional  
Multipurpose  
550sheet tray feeder  
Manual  
feeder  
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Legal  
216 x 340 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
Executive  
Universal*  
184 x 267 mm  
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.8 x 8.3 in.) up to  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) X  
up to 216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
X
7 3/4 Envelope  
(Monarch)  
98 x 191 mm  
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
9 Envelope  
98 x 225 mm  
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
Monarch  
105 x 241 mm  
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)  
110 x 220 mm  
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)  
162 x 229 mm  
(6.4 x 9 in.)  
105 x 241 mm  
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)  
Other Envelope  
98 x 162 mm  
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)  
* When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software  
program.  
Paper types supported by the printer  
Notes:  
Your printer model may have a 650sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550sheet tray and an integrated  
100sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550sheet tray part of the 650sheet duo drawer supports the same paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper and specialty media guide  
62  
as the optional 550sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and  
weights.  
The optional 550sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
Paper type  
Standard 250sheet Optional 550sheet Multipurpose feeder Manual feeder  
tray  
tray  
Paper  
Card stock  
Transparencies*  
Envelopes  
Paper labels  
X
X
X
* Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the standard tray, manual feeder, and  
the multipurpose feeder.  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer  
Notes:  
Your printer model may have a 650sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550sheet tray and an integrated  
100sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550sheet tray part of the 650sheet duo drawer supports the same paper  
as the optional 550sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and  
weights.  
The optional 550sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
Paper type  
Light1, 2  
250sheet tray  
Optional 550sheet  
Multipurpose feeder Manual feeder  
tray  
60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain 60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain 60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain 60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain  
long (16 to 19.9 lb  
bond)  
long (16 to 19.9 lb  
bond)  
long (16 to 19.9 lb  
bond)  
long (16 to 19.9 lb  
bond)  
Plain1, 2  
75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain 75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain 75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain 75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain  
long (20 to 23.8 lb  
bond)  
long (20 to 23.8 lb  
bond)  
long (20 to 23.8 lb  
bond)  
long (20 to 23.8 lb  
bond)  
1 Paper types must be set to match the supporting paper weights.  
2 The duplex supports paper weights between 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb) grain long bond. The duplex does not support card  
stock, transparencies, envelopes, or labels.  
3 For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, we recommend grain long fibers.  
4 Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the 250sheet tray, manual feeder, and  
multipurpose feeder.  
5 The pressure sensitive area must enter the printer first.  
6 100 percent cotton content maximum weight is 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond.  
7 105 g/m2 (28 lb) bond envelopes are limited to 25 percent cotton content.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper and specialty media guide  
63  
Paper type  
Heavy1, 2  
250sheet tray  
Optional 550sheet  
Multipurpose feeder Manual feeder  
tray  
90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain 90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain 90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain 90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain  
long (23.9 to 27.8 lb  
bond)  
long (23.9 to 27.8 lb  
bond)  
long (23.9 to 27.8 lb  
bond)  
long (23.9 to 27.8 lb  
bond)  
Cardstock1, 2  
105 to 176 g/m2 grain 105 to 176 g/m2 grain 105 to 176 g/m2 grain 105 to 176 g/m2 grain  
long (27.8 to 47 lb  
bond)  
long (27.8 to 47 lb  
bond)  
long (27.8 to 47 lb  
bond)  
long (27.8 to 47 lb  
bond)  
Book—88 to 176 g/m2 Book—88 to 176 g/m2 Book—88 to 176 g/m2 Book—88 to 176 g/m2  
Glossy papers  
grain long (60 to 120 lb grain long (60 to 120 lb grain long (60 to 120 lb grain long (60 to 120 lb  
book)  
book)  
book)  
book)  
Cover—162 to  
Cover—162 to  
Cover—162 to  
Cover—162 to  
176 g/m2 grain long (60 176 g/m2 grain long (60 176 g/m2 grain long (60 176 g/m2 grain long (60  
to 65 lb cover)  
Card stock—maximum Index Bristol—  
(grain long)3 120 g/m2 (67 lb)  
to 65 lb cover)  
to 65 lb cover)  
to 65 lb cover)  
Index Bristol—  
120 g/m2 (67 lb)  
Index Bristol—  
120 g/m2 (67 lb)  
Index Bristol—  
120 g/m2 (67 lb)  
Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb) Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb) Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb) Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb)  
Cover—135 g/m2  
(50 lb)  
Cover—135 g/m2  
(50 lb)  
Cover—135 g/m2  
(50 lb)  
Cover—135 g/m2  
(50 lb)  
Card stock—maximum Index Bristol—  
Index Bristol—  
163 g/m2 (90 lb)  
Index Bristol—  
163 g/m2 (90 lb)  
Index Bristol—  
163 g/m2 (90 lb)  
(grain short)1  
163 g/m2 (90 lb)  
Tag—163 g/m2 (100 lb) Tag—163 g/m2 (100 lb) Tag—163 g/m2 (100 lb) Tag—163 g/m2 (100 lb)  
Cover—176 g/m2  
(65 lb)  
Cover—176 g/m2  
(65 lb)  
Cover—176 g/m2  
(65 lb)  
Cover—176 g/m2  
(65 lb)  
Transparencies4  
Labels—maximum5  
Envelopes6,7  
170–180 g/m2 (45 to  
48 lb)  
170–180 g/m2 (45 to 170–180 g/m2 (45 to  
N/A  
48 lb)  
48 lb)  
Paper—131 g/m2  
(35 lb bond)  
Paper—131 g/m2 (35 lb Paper—131 g/m2  
bond)  
Paper—131 g/m2  
(35 lb bond)  
(35 lb bond)  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to  
28 lb bond) 28 lb bond)  
X
X
1 Paper types must be set to match the supporting paper weights.  
2 The duplex supports paper weights between 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb) grain long bond. The duplex does not support card  
stock, transparencies, envelopes, or labels.  
3 For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, we recommend grain long fibers.  
4 Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the 250sheet tray, manual feeder, and  
multipurpose feeder.  
5 The pressure sensitive area must enter the printer first.  
6 100 percent cotton content maximum weight is 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond.  
7 105 g/m2 (28 lb) bond envelopes are limited to 25 percent cotton content.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and specialty media guide  
64  
Paper capacities  
Input capacities  
Notes:  
Your printer model may have a 650sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550sheet tray and an integrated  
100sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550sheet tray part of the 650sheet duo drawer supports the same paper  
as the optional 550sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and  
weights.  
The optional 550sheet tray is not available for all printer models.  
Paper type  
Paper  
250sheet tray  
250 sheets1  
Optional 550sheet tray  
550 sheets1  
Multipurpose tray  
100 sheets1  
1002  
50  
X
2002  
X
502  
Labels  
Transparencies  
Envelopes  
Other  
50  
X
10  
Various quantities3  
X
X
1 Based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper  
2 Capacity varies depending on label material and construction.  
3 Capacity varies depending on the weight and type of paper.  
Output capacity  
Standard output bin1  
Paper type  
100 sheets2  
Paper  
1 Capacity may vary depending on media specifications and the printer operating environment.  
2 Based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
65  
Printing  
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancellation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty media  
can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" and "Storing print media."  
Printing a document  
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.  
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Do one of the following:  
For Windows users  
a With a document open, click File > Print.  
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded  
paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
c Click OK, and then click Print.  
For Macintosh users  
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.  
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Click OK.  
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the Print dialog and popup menus, adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or  
select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
3 Click Print.  
Warning—Potential Damage: While printing, do not touch the metal shaft in the area where the printer ejects paper  
into the standard exit bin.  
Printing on specialty media  
Tips on using letterhead  
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table to determine which direction to  
load the letterhead:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing  
66  
Source or process  
Print side and paper orientation  
Printed letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo is  
placed at the front of the tray.  
Standard 250sheet tray  
Optional 550sheet tray  
Simplex (onesided) printing  
from trays  
C
A B  
Duplex (twosided) printing from  
Printed letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the logo  
is placed at the back of the tray.  
trays  
C
A B  
Manual feeder (simplex printing)  
Multipurpose feeder  
Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the  
logo should enter the manual feeder first.  
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for  
laser printers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing  
67  
Source or process  
Print side and paper orientation  
Manual feeder (duplex printing)  
Multipurpose feeder  
Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo  
should enter the manual feeder last.  
C
A B  
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for  
laser printers.  
Tips on using transparencies  
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on transparencies:  
Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or optional multipurpose feeder.  
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure  
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.  
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for lettersize transparencies and Lexmark part number 12A8241  
for A4size transparencies.  
Tips on using envelopes  
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on envelopes:  
Feed envelopes from the manual feeder or optional multipurpose feeder.  
Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.  
Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the  
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
For the best performance, use envelopes made from 60 g/m2 (16 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)  
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Allcotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g/m2  
(24 lb bond) weight.  
Use only new envelopes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing  
68  
To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:  
Have excessive curl or twist  
Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
Have an interlocking design  
Have postage stamps attached  
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
Have bent corners  
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.  
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.  
Tips on using paper labels  
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
Note: Use only paper label sheets.  
When printing on labels:  
From MarkVision Professional, the printer software, or the printer control panel, set the Paper Type to Labels.  
Use only letter, A4, or legalsize label sheets.  
Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:  
The labels can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without  
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.  
Do not use labels with slick backing material.  
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets  
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.  
Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.  
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between diecuts of the label.  
Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)  
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.  
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and  
use a nonoozing adhesive.  
Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.  
Tips on using card stock  
Card stock is heavy, singleply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,  
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before  
buying large quantities.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing  
69  
When printing on card stock:  
From MarkVision Professional, the printer software, or the printer control panel:  
1 Set the Paper Type to Card Stock.  
2 Set the Paper Weight to Card Stock Weight.  
3 Set the Card Stock Weight to Normal or Heavy.  
Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or  
other paper handling problems.  
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F)  
without releasing hazardous emissions.  
Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting  
introduces semiliquid and volatile components into the printer.  
Use grain short card stock when possible.  
Printing from a flash drive  
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types.  
Notes:  
When a USB flash drive is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan to the flash drive or print files from  
the flash drive. All other printer functions are unavailable.  
Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.  
You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.  
To print from a flash drive:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyor Busyappears.  
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.  
Notes:  
If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, the  
printer ignores the flash drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
70  
If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, Busyappears. After the other jobs are  
processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.  
3 Press the arrow button until the document you want to print appears, and then press  
.
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear with a + in front of the folder (for example, + documents). File  
names are appended by the extension type (for example, .jpg).  
4 Press  
to print one copy, or enter the number of copies using the keypad, and then press  
to initiate the print  
job.  
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.  
Supported flash drives and file types  
Flash drive  
File type  
Documents:  
.pdf  
.pcx  
Lexar JumpDrive 2.0  
Pro (256 MB, 512 MB, or 1G sizes) or  
SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256 MB, 512 MB, or 1G sizes);  
.xps  
Notes:  
.dcx  
Images:  
.gif  
.JPEG  
.bmp  
.TIFF  
.png  
HiSpeed USB flash drives must support the Fullspeed standard. Devices supporting only USB  
Lowspeed capabilities are not supported.  
USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS  
(New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
71  
Printing photos from a PictBridgeenabled digital camera  
You can connect a PictBridgeenabled digital camera to the printer, and use the buttons on the camera to select and  
print photos.  
1 Insert one end of the USB cable into the camera.  
Note: Use only the USB cable that came with your camera.  
2 Insert the other end of the USB cable into the USB port on the front of the printer.  
Notes:  
Make sure the PictBridgeenabled digital camera is set to the correct USB mode. See the camera  
documentation for more information.  
If the PictBridge connection is successful, then a confirmation message appears on the printer display.  
3 Follow the instructions on the camera to select and print photos.  
Note: If the printer is turned off while the camera is connected, then you must disconnect and then reconnect the  
camera.  
Printing information pages  
For more information on printing these pages, see “Printing menu settings pages” on page 32 and “Printing a network  
Printing a font sample list  
To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reportsappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Fontsappears, and then press  
.
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until PCL Fonts, PostScript Fonts, or PPDS Fontsappears, and then press  
.
After the font sample list prints, Readyappears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing  
72  
Printing a directory list  
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the hard disk.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reportsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Directoryappears, and then press  
.
After the directory list prints, Readyappears.  
Printing the print quality test pages  
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Hold down  
and the right arrow button while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the dots appear, and wait for CONFIG MENUto appear.  
4 Press the arrow buttons until PRINT_QUAL_TXTappears, and then press  
.
The print quality test pages print.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Exit Config Menuappears, and then press  
.
Resetting the Printerappears briefly, and then Readyappears.  
Canceling a print job  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel  
1 Press  
.
Stopping . . .appears, followed by Cancel Print Job.  
2 Press  
.
Cancelingappears.  
Canceling a print job from the computer  
For Windows users  
1 Open the printers folder.  
In Windows 8  
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:  
Apps list > Run > type control printers> OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Printing  
73  
In Windows 7 or earlier  
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.  
c Press Enter, or click OK.  
2 Doubleclick the printer icon.  
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.  
4 Click Delete.  
For Macintosh users  
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:  
System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue  
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue  
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
74  
Copying  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Making copies  
Making a quick copy  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
Note: If a LexmarkTM Document Solutions Suite (LDSS) profile has been installed, then you may receive an error  
when attempting a quick copy. Contact your system support person for access.  
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Copying using the ADF  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 Adjust the paper guides.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copying  
75  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
4 Change the copy settings as needed.  
5 From the printer control panel, press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
Copying using the scanner glass  
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
3 Change the copy settings as needed.  
4 From the printer control panel, press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
5 Place the next document on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the  
numeric keypad.  
Copying photos  
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
3 Press the Content button until the light next to Photo comes on.  
4 Change the copy settings as needed.  
5 From the printer control panel, press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
6 Place the next document on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the  
numeric keypad.  
Copying on specialty media  
Copying to transparencies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Sourceappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the transparencies appears, and then press  
.
7 Change the copy settings as needed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copying  
76  
8 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Copying to letterhead  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Sourceappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the letterhead appears, and then press  
.
7 Change the copy settings as needed.  
8 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Customizing copy settings  
Copying from one size to another  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
Original Sizeappears.  
5 Press  
6 Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press  
7 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Sourceappears, and then press  
.
.
.
8 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the size you want the copy to be appears, and then press  
.
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the original size, then the printer will scale the size  
automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying  
77  
9 Change the copy settings as needed.  
10 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
11 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
12 Press  
to return to the Readystate.  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray  
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty media  
is loaded in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Sourceappears, and then press  
6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the media you want the copy to be on appears, and then  
press  
7 Change the copy settings as needed.  
8 Press for a black only copy or  
.
.
for a color copy.  
9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
10 Press  
to return to the Readystate.  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
Note: The duplex feature is not available on selected printer models.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 Press the Duplex/2Sided button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until 1 To 2 Sidedappears, and then press  
.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For  
example, select 1sided to 2sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2sided copies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
78  
6 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
7 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The  
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will  
be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.  
To reduce or enlarge a copy:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 Press the Scale button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until the scale option you want appears, and then press  
.
If you selected Custom then do the following:  
a Press the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the size, or enter a number between 25 and 400 on the numeric  
keypad.  
b Press  
6 Press  
.
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
7 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Making a copy lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 Press the Darkness button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons to make the copy lighter or darker.  
6 Press  
.
7 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
79  
Adjusting copy quality  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 Press the Content button until the light comes on next to the setting that best represents what you are copying:  
Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art  
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Photo—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print  
5 Press  
for a black only copy or  
for a color copy.  
6 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
7 Press  
to return to the Readystate.  
Collating copies  
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the  
copies as groups of pages (not collated).  
Collated  
Not collated  
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.  
To turn collation off:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Collateappears, and then press  
6 Press the arrow buttons until Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]appears, and then press  
7 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.  
.
.
8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
80  
Placing separator sheets between copies  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Copy Settings.  
4 Click Separator Sheets.  
Note: Collation must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collation is Off, then the  
separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.  
5 Select one of the following:  
Between pages  
Between copies  
Between jobs  
6 Click Submit.  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet  
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiplepage document onto a single  
sheet of paper.  
Notes:  
The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.  
The Copy Size must be set to 100%.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.  
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Saverappears, and then press  
.
6 Select the output you want.  
For example, if you have four portrait-oriented original documents that you want copied to the same side of one  
sheet, stop at 4 on 1 Portrait, and then press  
.
7 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.  
8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on  
the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
81  
Canceling a copy job  
A copy job can be canceled when the document is in the ADF, on the scanner glass, or while the document is printing.  
To cancel a copy job:  
1 From the printer control, panel press  
.
Stoppingappears, followed by Cancel Job.  
2 Press  
to cancel the job.  
Note: If you want to continue to process the job, then press  
to continue copying.  
Cancelingappears.  
The printer clears all pages in the ADF or printer and then cancels the job. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen  
appears.  
Improving copy quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text  
mode?  
Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and preserving images  
copied from the original document is not a concern.  
Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain  
only text or fine line art.  
When should I use  
Text/Photo mode?  
Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text  
and graphics.  
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and  
brochures.  
When should I use  
Photograph mode?  
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E-mailing  
82  
E-mailing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
You can use the printer to email scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an email  
from the printer. You can type the email address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.  
Getting ready to e-mail  
Setting up the e-mail function  
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer settings and have a valid IP address or gateway address. To  
set up the e-mail function:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Server Setup.  
5 Change the email settings as needed.  
6 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
E-mailing  
83  
Setting up the address book  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click Manage E-mail Shortcuts.  
5 Change the email settings as needed.  
6 Click Submit.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Manage Destinations.  
Note: You may be asked to enter a password. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system  
support person.  
4 Click E-mail Destination Setup.  
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.  
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, separate each address with a comma (,).  
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
E-mailing a document  
Sending an e-mail using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.  
Scan to Emailappears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
E-mailing  
84  
4 Press  
.
Searchor Manual Entryappears.  
Note: If there are no entries in the address book, then Manual Entryappears.  
5 Press  
to search the address book or press the arrow buttons until Manualappears, and then press  
or enter an email address.  
to select  
Using the address book  
a After selecting Searchon the printer control panel, press the arrow buttons until the address you want  
appears, and then press  
.
b Press 1 to search for another address or press 2 to end the search.  
After you press 2, Press Start To Beginappears.  
c Press  
to send a black only copy or  
to send a color copy.  
Manually entering an email address  
After selecting Manualon the printer control panel, Entry Nameappears on the first line and a blank line with  
a blinking cursor appears on the second line.  
a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number or letter you want. The first time  
you press the button, the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters  
assigned to that button appears.  
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the  
next space.  
c Once the email address is entered, press  
.
Another Email? 1=Yes 2=NOappears.  
d Press 1 to enter another address, or press 2 to end the address entry.  
After you press 2, Press Start To Beginappears.  
e Press  
to send a black only copy or  
to send a color copy.  
Sending an email using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.  
Scan to Emailappears.  
4 Press  
.
Searchappears.  
Note: If there are no entries in the address book, Manual Entryappears.  
#
5 Press  
, and then enter the recipient's shortcut number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E-mailing  
85  
6 Press 1 to enter another shortcut or press 2 to end the shortcut entry.  
After you press 2, Press Start To Beginappears.  
7 Press  
to send a black only email or  
to send a color email.  
Sending an e-mail using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.  
Scan to Emailappears.  
4 Press  
.
Searchappears.  
Note: If there are no entries in the address book, Manual Entryappears.  
5 Press  
to search the address book.  
6 Press the arrow buttons until the address you want appears, and then press  
.
7 Press 1 to search for another address or press 2 to end the search.  
After you press 2, Press Start To Beginappears.  
8 Press  
to send a black only copy or  
to send a color copy.  
Canceling an e-mail  
An email can be canceled when the document is in the ADF or on the scanner glass. To cancel an email:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
Stoppingappears, and then Cancel Jobappears.  
.
2 Press  
to cancel the job.  
Note: If you want to continue to process the job, press  
to continue scanning the email.  
Cancelingappears.  
The printer clears all pages in the ADF and then cancels the job. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
86  
Faxing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Getting the printer ready to fax  
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or  
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning  
storm.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or  
receiving a fax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
87  
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web  
Server and then enter the Settings menu.  
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup  
information.  
Using the printer control panel for fax setup  
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of startup  
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:  
Station Name  
Station Number  
1 When Station Nameappears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number or letter you want. The first time  
you press the button, the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters  
assigned to that button appears.  
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the  
next space.  
2 After entering the Station Name, press  
.
The display changes to Station Number.  
3 When Station Numberappears, enter the printer fax number.  
a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number you want.  
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the  
next space.  
4 After entering the Station Number, press  
.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.  
7 Click Submit.  
Choosing a fax connection  
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To  
determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Faxing  
88  
Notes:  
The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such  
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in  
the setup steps.  
If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.  
Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can  
interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.  
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line  
to send and receive faxes.  
Equipment and service options  
Fax connection setup  
Connect directly to the telephone line  
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 89.  
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) system  
Use a Distinctive Ring service  
Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering See “Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same  
machine  
Connect through an adapter used in your area  
Connect to a computer with a modem  
Connecting to an analog telephone line  
If your telecommunications equipment uses a USstyle (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the  
equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Faxing  
89  
Connecting to a DSL service  
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then  
follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.  
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.  
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.  
3
2
1
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system  
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.  
Notes:  
Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.  
Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.  
When using a PBX, make sure the call waiting tone is off.  
When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.  
For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
90  
Connecting to a Distinctive Ring Service  
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple  
phone numbers on one telephone line with each phone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for  
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, follow these steps to connect  
the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
3 Change the distinctive ring setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer.  
a From the printer control panel, press  
b Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
c Press the arrow buttons until Fax Settingsappears, and then press  
.
.
.
d Press the arrow buttons until Distinctive Ringsappears, and then press  
.
e Press the arrow buttons until the desired ring tone appears, and then press  
.
Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line  
1 Remove the plug from the bottom EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
91  
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the bottom EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region  
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the wall outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Faxing  
92  
Country/region  
Austria  
Cyprus  
Denmark  
Finland  
France  
Germany  
Ireland  
Italy  
New Zealand  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Portugal  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
United Kingdom  
Countries or regions except Germany  
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering  
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.  
There is a plug installed in the bottom EXT port  
the adapter.  
of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of  
Note: Do not remove the plug if you have a serial phone system or wish to connect a phone or answering machine to  
the adapter. If you remove it, then other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones or  
answering machines) may not work.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.  
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the telephone jack used in your  
location.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
94  
3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
95  
Germany  
There is a plug installed in the bottom EXT port  
of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of  
the fax function and the proper operation of downstream phones.  
Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, then other telecommunications devices in your home (such as  
telephones or answering machines) may not work.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port on the back of the printer.  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the N slot of an  
active analog telephone wall jack.  
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the telephone jack used in your  
location.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
96  
3 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, then connect a second telephone  
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
97  
4 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second  
telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog telephone  
wall jack.  
Connecting to a computer with a modem  
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
A telephone  
A computer with a modem  
Three telephone cords  
A telephone wall jack  
2 Connect a telephone cord into the top LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall  
jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Faxing  
98  
3 Remove the protective plug from the bottom EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.  
Note: Refer to the manual that came with your computer for the telephone connections.  
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the bottom EXT port  
of the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faxing  
99  
Setting the outgoing fax name and number  
To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.  
7 Click Submit.  
Setting the date and time  
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have  
to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Set Date and Time.  
4 Click inside the Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.  
5 Click Submit.  
Turning daylight saving time on or off  
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Set Date and Time.  
4 In the Daylight Savings box, click on one of the following:  
Yes turns daylight saving on.  
No turns daylight saving off.  
5 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
100  
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax using the printer control panel  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.  
To:appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.  
4 Enter the fax number, and then press  
.
Notes:  
To place a dial pause within a fax number, press the Redial/Pause button. The dial pause appears as a  
comma on the Fax to: line. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.  
Press  
To use a fax shortcut, press  
Then, press  
5 Press 1 to enter another fax number, or press 2 to end fax number entry.  
6 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.  
to move the cursor to the left and delete a number.  
, and then press the arrow buttons until the fax shortcut you want appears.  
.
Sending a fax using the computer  
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works  
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.  
1 With a document open, click File > Print.  
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Navigate to:  
Fax tab > Enable fax  
4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.  
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature  
5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.  
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.  
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the  
appropriate information.  
8 Click OK.  
Notes:  
The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on  
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
101  
The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it  
can be used.  
If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the  
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent  
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.  
Creating shortcuts  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send  
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. You can create a shortcut to a single  
fax number or a group of fax numbers.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Manage Destinations.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.  
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.  
To create a multiplenumber shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.  
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).  
6 Assign a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.  
To:appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.  
4 Press  
.
Address Book Searchappears.  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Addappears, and then press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
102  
6 Press the arrow buttons until Enter Fax Numberappears, and then press  
.
7 Enter the fax number, and then press  
.
8 Press 1 to enter another fax number, or press 2 to end fax number entry.  
9 After selecting 2=NO, Enter Nameappears.  
a Press the button on the keypad that corresponds with the letter you want. The first time you press the button,  
the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters assigned to that button  
appears.  
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the  
next space.  
c Once the fax name is entered, press  
.
Save as Shortcutappears.  
d Enter the shortcut number, and then press  
.
Using shortcuts and the address book  
Using fax destination shortcuts  
Fax destination shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut  
numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in  
the Manage Destinations link located under the Configuration tab on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number  
(1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax destination with a shortcut  
number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
#
3 Press  
.
Enter Shortcut:appears.  
4 Enter the shortcut number.  
5 Press  
to send a black only fax or  
to send a color fax.  
Using the address book  
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, contact your system support person.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Faxing  
103  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.  
To:appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.  
4 Press  
, and then press the arrow buttons until the fax number you want appears. Then, press  
.
Customizing fax settings  
Changing the fax resolution  
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra  
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Resolution area.  
4 Press the arrow buttons until the resolution value you want appears, and then press  
5 Press to send a black only copy or to send a color copy.  
.
Making a fax lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button.  
4 Press the arrow buttons to make the fax lighter or darker.  
5 Press  
.
6 Press  
to send a black only fax or  
to send a color fax.  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.  
To:appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.  
4 Enter the fax number, and then press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Faxing  
104  
5 From the Fax area, press the Options button.  
6 Press the arrow buttons until Delayed Sendappears, and then press  
.
Set Send Timeappears on the first line, and HH:MMwith a blinking cursor appears on the second line.  
7 Using the numeric keypad, enter the time you want to send the fax. After you enter the time, the cursor moves to  
the AM or PM field if the printer clock is set to 12 Hourformat. Press the arrow buttons to change from AM to  
PM or PM to AM.  
8 Press  
.
Set Send Dateappears on the first line, and MMDDYYYYwith a blinking cursor appears on the second line.  
9 Using the numeric keypad, enter the date you want to send the fax.  
10 Press  
.
11 Press  
to send a black only fax or  
to send a color fax.  
Viewing a fax log  
1 Open a Web browser.  
2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.  
3 Click Reports.  
4 Click Fax Settings.  
5 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.  
Canceling an outgoing fax  
A fax can be canceled when the document is in the ADF or on the scanner glass. To cancel a fax:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
.
Stoppingappears, and then Cancel Jobappears.  
2 Press  
to cancel the job.  
Note: If you want to continue to process the job, press  
to resume scanning the fax.  
Cancelingappears.  
The printer clears all pages in the ADF and then cancels the job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Faxing  
105  
Understanding fax options  
Original Size  
This option lets you choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.  
1 From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Options button.  
Original Sizeappears.  
2 Press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press  
.
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the  
quality and size of your scan.  
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it  
takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.  
Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.  
Resolution  
This option increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a  
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the  
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.  
Standard—Suitable for most documents  
Fine—Recommended for documents with small print  
Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Faxing  
106  
Improving fax quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text  
mode?  
Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and preserving images  
copied from the original document is not a concern.  
Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that  
contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use  
Text/Photo mode?  
Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and  
graphics.  
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.  
When should I use Photo Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or  
mode? newspaper.  
Forwarding a fax  
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click inside the Fax Forwarding box, and then select one of the following:  
Print  
Print and Forward  
Forward  
6 From the Forward to list, select Fax.  
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.  
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward  
to” box.  
8 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to an FTP address  
107  
Scanning to an FTP address  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent  
to the server at a time.  
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes  
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be  
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending a  
document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your  
network instead of over the phone line.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.  
4 Press the arrow buttons until FTP appears, and then press  
.
5 Type the FTP address.  
6 Press  
to send a blackonly copy or  
to send a color copy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning to an FTP address  
108  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.  
4 Press the arrow buttons until FTP appears, and then press  
.
#
5 Press  
, and then enter the recipient's shortcut number.  
6 Press 1 to enter another shortcut or press 2 to end the shortcut entry.  
After you press 2, Press Start To Beginappears.  
7 Press  
to send a blackonly copy or  
to send a color copy.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Destinations.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support  
person.  
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.  
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device  
109  
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory  
device  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
1@  
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7PQ  
6MN  
RS  
O
8TU  
V
9WXY  
*
Z
0
#
Use the ADF for multiplepage documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a USB flash memory device. The computer does not  
have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to  
the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the  
printer.  
Note: Scanning to a computer or USB device is not available on selected printer models.  
Scanning to a computer  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Scan Profile.  
3 Click Create Scan Profile.  
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.  
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.  
6 Enter a profile name.  
The profile name is also the user name, it is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.  
7 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device  
110  
8 Scan your document.  
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. Remember this shortcut number and use  
it when you are ready to scan your documents.  
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
c Press the Scan/Email button.  
d Press the arrow buttons until Profilesappears, and then press  
.
#
e Press  
.
Enter Shortcut:appears.  
f Enter the shortcut number.  
g Press  
or  
to send the scanned image.  
Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button  
does not change these settings.  
9 Return to the computer to view the file.  
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.  
Scanning to a USB flash memory device  
Note: The USB port is not available on selected printer models.  
1 Insert a USB flash memory device into the front USB port.  
Access USBappears.  
Note: When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan to the USB device  
or print files from the USB device. All other printer functions are unavailable.  
2 Press 1 on the keypad.  
3 Press the arrow buttons until Scan to USBappears, and then press  
.
Press Start To Beginappears.  
4 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
5 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
6 Press  
or  
to send the scanned image.  
Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button does  
not change these settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device  
111  
Understanding scan to computer options  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Improving scan quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text  
mode?  
Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and preserving images  
copied from the original document is not a concern.  
Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only  
contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use  
Text/Photo mode?  
Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text  
and graphics.  
Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.  
When should I use Photo Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or  
mode? newspaper.  
Using the Scan Center software  
Understanding the Scan Center features  
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings  
modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.  
The following features are available:  
Scan and send images to your computer  
Convert scanned images to text  
Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast  
Make larger scans without losing detail  
Scan twosided documents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device  
112  
Using the ScanBack utility  
Using the ScanBack Utility  
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create Scan to PC profiles. The  
ScanBack Utility is on the Software and Documentation CD.  
1 Set up your Scan to PC profile.  
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.  
b Select the printer you want to use.  
If noprinters are listed, then see your system support person to obtain a list, or click the Setup button tomanually  
search for an IP address or hostname.  
c Follow the instructions on the screens to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output  
you want to create.  
d Make sure to select:  
Show MFP Instructions—if you want to view or print the final directions  
Create Shortcut—if you want to save this group of settings to use again  
e Click Finish.  
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.  
2 Scan your original documents.  
a Locate the printer you specified in the scan profile.  
b Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.  
c From the printer control panel, press Scan/Email.  
d Press the arrow buttons until Profilesappears, and then press  
e Press the arrow buttons until your scan profile name appears, and then press  
f Press or to send the scanned image.  
.
.
Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button  
does not change these settings.  
g Return to your computer.  
Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
113  
Clearing jams  
Avoiding jams  
The following hints can help you avoid jams.  
Paper tray recommendations  
Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.  
Do not remove trays while the printer is printing.  
Do not load trays, the multipurpose feeder, or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing. Load them prior  
to printing, or wait for a prompt to load them.  
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.  
Make sure the guides in the paper trays, multipurpose feeder, or envelope feeder are properly positioned and are  
not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.  
Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.  
Paper recommendations  
Use only recommended paper or specialty media. For more information, see “Paper types and weights supported  
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.  
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.  
Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.  
Envelope recommendations  
To reduce wrinkling, use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu.  
Do not feed envelopes that:  
Have excessive curl or twist  
Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
Have an interlocking design  
Have postage stamps attached  
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
Have bent corners  
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
114  
Understanding jam numbers and locations  
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. The following illustration and table list the paper  
jams that can occur and the location of each jam. Open doors and covers, and remove trays to access jam locations.  
8
3
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
1
@
!.  
2
4
2AB  
C
4GHI  
3DEF  
Y
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
6MN  
O
RS  
8TUV  
9
W
XYZ  
*
0
#
5
1
6
7
Jam  
Jam location  
Instructions  
number  
1
200  
Standard 250sheet  
tray and manual  
feeder (Tray 1)  
1 Open the front door. Inspect the area behind the front door, and then  
remove any jams.  
2 Open the fuser cover. Inspect the area under the cover, and then remove  
any jams.  
2
3
4
5
201  
202  
230  
235  
Under the fuser  
In the fuser  
3 Close the front door.  
4 Pull Tray 1 out. Inspect the tray area, and then remove any jams.  
5 Verify that the paper is loaded correctly.  
6 Reinsert Tray 1.  
In the duplex  
In the duplex  
Note: This jam  
number indicates  
that the paper being  
used for a duplex  
print job is not  
supported.  
6
7
242 and 550sheet tray  
1 Pull the 550-sheet tray out, and then remove any jams.  
2 Reinsert the tray.  
243  
250  
In the multipurpose  
1 Press the release latch to the left to release the multipurpose feeder.  
2 Inspect the multipurpose feeder, and then remove any jams.  
3 Close the multipurpose feeder.  
feeder  
ADF  
Note: You may need to open the 650sheet duo tray to remove jammed pages  
behind the multipurpose feeder.  
8
290  
Open the ADF cover, and then remove the jam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
115  
200 paper jam  
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder out.  
2 Remove the jam.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Insert the tray.  
4 Press  
.
201 paper jam  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1
@
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
DEF  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
5JKL  
8TUV  
7
PQ  
RS  
*
0
#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
116  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
1@  
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
3DEF  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
5JK  
L
7PQ  
RS  
8TUV  
*
0
#
Notes:  
Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
There may be a second sheet jammed if 200.xx Paper Jamand 202.xx Paper Jamappear.  
3 Close the front door.  
4 Press  
.
202 paper jam  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1
@
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
3DEF  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
5JKL  
8TUV  
7
PQ  
RS  
*
0
#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing jams  
117  
2 Grasp the green lever, and then pull the fuser cover toward you.  
3 Hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper.  
The fuser cover closes when released.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
4 Close the front door.  
5 Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing jams  
118  
230 paper jam  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
2 Remove the jam.  
3 Press  
.
235 paper jam  
This jam occurs when the paper is too short for the duplex unit.  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
2 Remove the jam.  
3 Load the tray with the correct paper size (A4, letter, legal, folio).  
4 Insert the tray.  
5 Close the front door.  
6 Press  
.
242 and 243 paper jams  
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the optional 550sheet tray out.  
Note: The optional 550sheet tray is not available on all printer models.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Insert the tray.  
4 Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clearing jams  
119  
250 paper jam  
1 Push the lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the paper jammed.  
2 Remove the jam.  
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.  
3 Insert the tray.  
4 Press  
.
290 paper jam  
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.  
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
3 Close the ADF cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
120  
4 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.  
5 Close the scanner cover.  
6 Press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
121  
Understanding printer menus  
Menus list  
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. These menus can be accessed from  
the printer control panel, Embedded Web Server, or the software application driver.  
Notes:  
Certain menus are not available on selected printer models.  
A setting with an * indicates it is the current default setting.  
Supplies Menu  
Paper Menu  
Reports  
Network/Ports  
Cyan Cartridge  
Magenta Cartridge  
Yellow Cartridge  
Black Cartridge  
Imaging Kit  
Default Source  
Size/Type  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Network Setup Page  
Wireless Setup Page  
Shortcut List  
Active NIC  
Network Menu  
Wireless Menu  
USB Menu  
Paper Texture  
Paper Weight  
Paper Loading  
Custom Type  
Custom Scan Sizes  
Universal Setup  
Waste Toner Bottle  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
Copy Shortcuts  
Email Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Print Fonts  
Print Directory  
Print Defects  
Print Demo  
Asset Report  
Settings  
General Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
Flash Drive Menu  
Print Settings  
Set Date/Time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
122  
Supplies menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black Toner Cartridges  
Shows the status of the toner cartridges  
Early Warning  
Low  
Invalid  
Note: 88 Replace <color> Cartridgeindicates  
the cartridge is nearly empty, and print quality problems  
may result.  
Replace  
Missing or Defective  
OK  
Unsupported  
Imaging Kit  
Shows the status of the imaging kit  
OK  
Replace Black Imaging Kit  
Replace Black and Color Imaging Kit  
Waste Toner Box  
Near Full  
Replace  
Shows the status of the waste toner bottle  
Missing  
OK  
Paper menu  
Default Source menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Notes:  
Default Source  
Tray <x>  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Env  
The 650sheetduo drawer must be installed in order for MP Feeder to  
appear as a menu setting in the Paper Menu.  
Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.  
A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source  
setting for the duration of the print job.  
If the same size and type of paper are in more than one tray, and the  
Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically  
linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
123  
Size/Type menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Tray <x> Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
Legal  
Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Executive  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Folio  
Universal  
A4  
If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size  
and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically linked.  
When one tray is empty, the job prints using paper from the linked tray.  
A5  
JIS B5  
Tray <x> Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x> is  
the factory default setting for all other trays.  
If available, a userdefined name will appear instead of Custom  
Glossy  
Labels  
Bond  
Type <x>.  
Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton  
Custom Type <x>  
Manual Paper Size  
Letter  
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
A4  
A5  
A5  
JIS B5  
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
124  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded  
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Glossy  
Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton  
Custom Type <x>  
MP Feeder Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
Legal  
From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Executive  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
A4  
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size. The  
paper size value must be set.  
A5  
A5  
JIS B5  
MP Feeder Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.  
Notes:  
From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
Glossy  
Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton  
Custom Type <x>  
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
125  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Envelope Size  
10 Envelope  
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded  
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the  
DL Envelope  
international factory default setting.  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
Other Envelope  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
Manual Envelope Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded  
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.  
Custom Type <x>  
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Paper Texture menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Plain Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Card Stock Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if card stock is supported.  
Transparency Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Recycled Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Glossy Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the Glossy paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Labels Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
126  
Menu item  
Description  
Bond Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Envelope Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Letterhead Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Preprinted Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Colored Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Light Paper  
Smooth  
Normal  
Specifies the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Rough  
Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Heavy Paper  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Specifies the relative texture of the rough/cotton paper loaded in a specific tray  
Rough  
Notes:  
Rough is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Custom <x> Paper  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
127  
Paper Weight menu  
Menu items  
Definition  
Plain Weight, Glossy Weight, Bond Weight, Letterhead Weight,  
Preprinted Weight, or Colored Weight  
Identifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in  
a specific tray  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Transparency Weight  
Identifies the relative weight of the transparencies  
loaded in a specific tray  
Light  
Normal  
Heavy  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Recycled Weight  
Light  
Identifies the relative weight of the recycled paper  
loaded in a specific tray  
Normal  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Labels Weight  
Light  
Identifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in  
a specific tray  
Normal  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Envelope Weight  
Light  
Identifies the relative weight of the envelopes  
loaded in a specific tray or feeder  
Normal  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Heavy  
Card Stock Weight  
Light  
Identifies the relative weight of the card stock  
loaded in a specific tray  
Normal  
Notes:  
Heavy  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if card stock is  
supported.  
Light Paper Weight  
Identifies the relative weight of the light paper  
loaded in a specific tray  
Light  
Notes:  
Light is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if light paper is  
supported.  
Heavy Paper Weight  
Identifies the relative weight of the heavy paper  
loaded in a specific tray  
Heavy  
Notes:  
Heavy is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if heavy paper is  
supported.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
128  
Menu items  
Definition  
Rough/Cotton Paper Weight  
Identifies the relative weight of the rough/cotton  
paper loaded in a specific tray  
Normal  
Notes:  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if rough/cotton paper is  
supported.  
Custom <x>  
Light  
Identifies the relative weight of the custom paper  
type loaded in a specific tray  
Normal  
Heavy  
Notes:  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
Settings appear only if custom paper is  
supported.  
Paper Loading menu  
Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.  
Menu item  
Description  
Recycled Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Recycled as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Glossy Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Glossy as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Bond Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Bond as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Letterhead Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Letterhead as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Preprinted Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Preprinted as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Colored Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Colored as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Light Paper Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Light Paper as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2sided printing for every print job unless 1sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties (in Windows) or the Print dialog (in Macintosh).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
129  
Menu item  
Description  
Heavy Paper Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Heavy Paper as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Rough/Cotton Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Rough/Cotton as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Custom <x> Loading  
Determines whether 2sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Custom <x> as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is  
supported.  
Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2sided printing for every print job unless 1sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties (in Windows) or the Print dialog (in Macintosh).  
Custom Types menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Custom Type <x>  
Paper  
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom  
Type <x>name or a userdefined Custom Name created from the Embedded  
Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional. This userdefined name displays  
instead of Custom Type <x>.  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Notes:  
Labels  
Envelope  
Rough/Cotton  
Paper is the factory default setting.  
The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder  
in order for you to print from that source.  
Recycled  
Paper  
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus  
Notes:  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Paper is the factory default setting.  
The Recycled type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in  
order for you to print from that source.  
Labels  
Envelope  
Cotton  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
130  
Custom Scan Sizes menu  
Menu item  
Description  
ID Card  
Specifies a nonstandard scan size.  
Width  
Notes:  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
Height  
4.83 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 123 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Width.  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
6.32 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 161 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Height.  
Orientation  
Landscape  
Portrait  
2 scans per side  
Off  
Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
On is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
On  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Scan Size Name  
Width  
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom  
Scan Size <x>name in the printer menus.  
Notes:  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
Height  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
Orientation  
Landscape  
Portrait  
2 scans per side  
Off  
8.5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Width.  
14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Height.  
Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
On  
Universal Setup menu  
These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal Paper Size is a  
userdefined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support  
for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.  
Menu item  
Description  
Units of Measure  
Inches  
Identifies the units of measure  
Notes:  
Millimeters  
Inches is the US factory default setting.  
Millimeters is the international factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
131  
Menu item  
Description  
Portrait Width  
3–14.7 inches  
76–360 mm  
Sets the portrait width  
Notes:  
If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum  
width allowed.  
8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased  
in 0.01inch increments.  
216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1mm increments.  
Portrait Height  
3–14.7 inches  
76–360 mm  
Sets the portrait height  
Notes:  
If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum  
height allowed.  
14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in  
0.01inch increments.  
356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1mm increments.  
Reports menu  
Reports menu  
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.  
Menu item  
Description  
Menu Settings Page  
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed  
memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the printer control panel  
language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network  
connection, and other information  
Device Statistics  
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details  
about printed pages  
Network Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such  
as the TCP/IP address information  
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
Shortcut List  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes  
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,  
and blocked calls  
Copy Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts  
Email Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about email shortcuts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
132  
Menu item  
Fax Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Print Fonts  
Description  
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts  
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer  
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in  
the printer  
Print Defects  
Prints a repeating defects page used as a diagnostic tool for identifying print  
problems  
Note: Should be printed on letteror A4size paper. If printed on smaller  
paper, the content will be clipped.  
Print Demo  
Prints a resident demonstration page  
Asset Report  
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number  
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned  
into an asset database.  
Network/Ports  
Active NIC menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Active NIC  
Auto  
Shows the print server  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print  
List of networks  
servers.  
Network menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
On is the factory default setting.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
133  
Menu item  
Description  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
On is the factory default setting.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Off  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Auto  
Notes:  
Auto is the factory default setting  
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Network Buffer  
Disabled  
Sets the size of the network input buffer  
Notes:  
Auto  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
The value can be changed in 1K increments.  
The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or  
reduce the size of the USB buffer.  
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Network Setup  
Reports Menu  
Network Card menu  
TCIP Menu  
Lists all the network setup menus, regardless of the active network of the printer  
Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.  
IPv6 Menu  
Wireless menu  
AppleTalk menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
134  
Wireless menu  
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers when an optional wireless  
internal print server is installed in the printer.  
Menu item  
Mode  
Description  
Lets you select a mode  
Notes:  
Infrastructure  
Ad hoc  
Infrastructure mode makes the printer wireless network accessible  
through an access point.  
Ad hoc mode configures the printer for peertopeer wireless  
networking.  
Compatibility  
802.11n  
Lets you select a setting that is compatible with your equipment  
802.11b/g  
802.11b/g/n  
Choose Network  
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use  
<list of available network names>  
View Signal Quality  
View Security Mode  
Lets you view the strength of the wireless connection  
Lets you view the security of the wireless connection  
USB menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
On is the factory default setting.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
On is the factory default setting.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
135  
Menu item  
Description  
NPA Mode  
Off  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Auto  
Notes:  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
USB Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
Sets the size of the USB input buffer  
Notes:  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
ENA Address  
ENA Netmask  
ENA Gateway  
Sets the network address information for an external print server that is attached  
to the printer using a USB cable  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external  
printer server through the USB port.  
Sets the netmask information for an external print server that is attached to the  
printer using a USB cable  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external  
print server through the USB port.  
Sets the gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the  
printer using a USB cable  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external  
print server through the USB port.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
136  
Settings menu  
General Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Display Language  
English  
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display  
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.  
Francais  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Portuguese  
Suomi  
Russian  
Polski  
Magyar  
Turkce  
Cesky  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
Korean  
Japanese  
EcoMode  
Off  
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media  
Notes:  
Energy  
Energy/Paper  
Paper  
Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its  
factory default settings.  
The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.  
Performance may be affected but quality is not.  
Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media  
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected but  
quality is not.  
Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and  
specialty media.  
Quiet Mode  
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
On configures the printer to produce as little noise as  
possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
137  
Menu item  
Description  
Run Initial setup  
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard  
Notes:  
Yes  
No  
Yes is the factory default setting.  
After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the  
Country select screen, the default setting becomes No.  
Paper Sizes  
U.S.  
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default  
setting is determined by the country selection in the initial setup  
wizard.  
Metric  
Scan to PC Port Range  
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking  
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers  
separated by a semicolon.  
<port range>  
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.  
Default Mode  
Copy  
Sets the function the printer enters when Go, Content, Darkness,  
or any number is pressed on the printer control panel  
Fax  
Note: Copy is the factory default setting  
Date Format  
MMDDYYYY  
DDMMYYYY  
YYYYMMDD  
Formats the printer date  
Note: MMDDYYYY is the US factory default setting and  
DDMMYYYY is the international factory default setting.  
Time Format  
Formats the printer time  
12 hour A.M./P.M.  
24 hour clock  
Note: The factory default setting is 12 hour A.M./P.M.  
Alarms  
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator  
intervention. Available selections for each alarm type are:  
Alarm Control  
Cartridge Alarm  
Off  
Single  
Continuous  
Notes:  
Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single  
sounds three quick beeps.  
Off means no alarm will sound.  
Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.  
Timeouts  
Power Saver  
Disabled  
1–240  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems  
begin entering a minimum power state.  
Note: 30 minutes is the factory default setting.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before  
returning the printer display to a Readystate  
Screen Timeout  
15–300  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
138  
Menu item  
Description  
Timeouts  
Print Timeout  
Disabled  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an  
endofjob message before canceling the remainder of the print job  
Notes:  
1–255  
90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the  
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any  
new print jobs are waiting.  
Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS  
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation  
print jobs.  
Timeouts  
Wait Timeout  
Disabled  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional  
data before canceling a print job  
Notes:  
15–65535  
40 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using  
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or  
PPDS emulation print jobs.  
Print Recovery  
Auto Continue  
Disabled  
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline  
situations when not resolved within the specified time period  
Notes:  
5–255  
Disabled is the factory default setting.  
5–255 is a range of time in seconds.  
Print Recovery  
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages  
Jam Recovery  
Notes:  
On  
Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints  
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages  
is needed for other printer tasks.  
Off  
Auto  
On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.  
Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.  
Print Recovery  
Page Protect  
On  
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed  
otherwise  
Notes:  
Off  
Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page  
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.  
On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the  
entire page prints.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
139  
Menu item  
Description  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Notes:  
Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore  
keeps the userdefined settings.  
Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default  
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads  
stored in RAM are deleted.  
Copy Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Content  
Text  
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job  
Notes:  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white  
background.  
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original  
documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.  
Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.  
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction  
of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the  
amount of information saved.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (twosided) or simplex (one-sided),  
and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex  
1 sided to 1 sided  
1 sided to 2 sided  
2 sided to 1 sided  
2 sided to 2 sided  
Notes:  
Duplex is not available on selected models.  
1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on one side.  
1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets,  
the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.  
2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied  
page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is  
three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy  
is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.  
2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy  
mimics the original exactly.  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
2 on 1 Portrait  
2 on 1 Landscape  
4 on 1 Portrait  
4 on 1 Landscape  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
140  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Page Borders  
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
On  
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of  
the job  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Notes:  
Original Size  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
ID Card  
Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
setting.  
A setting with an * indicates it is the current default setting.  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Paper Source  
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Single Sheet Feeder  
Multi Sheet Feeder  
Transparency Separators  
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Darkness  
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job  
4 to +4  
Note: The factory default setting is 0.  
Number of Copies  
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job  
1–999  
Note: The factory default setting is 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
141  
Menu item  
Description  
Overlay  
Off  
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Confidential  
Copy  
Draft  
Urgent  
Custom  
Allow priority copies  
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
4 to +4  
Note: The factory default setting is 0.  
Color Balance  
Cyan–Red  
Specifies the amount of color from 4 to +4.  
Note: The factory default setting is 0.  
Magenta–Green  
Yellow–Blue  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-toedge prior to copying  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Fax Settings menu  
General Fax Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Station Name  
Station Number  
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer  
Specifies a number associated with the fax  
Specifies how the fax is identified  
Station ID  
Station Name  
Station Number  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
142  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Manual Fax  
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone  
hand set  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax  
number.  
Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.  
Defines the amount of non-volatile memory used to fax a job  
Notes:  
Memory Use  
All receive  
Mostly receive  
Equal  
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
Mostly sent  
All send  
Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and  
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.  
“Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
Cancel Faxes  
Allow  
Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs  
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.  
Don't Allow  
Caller ID  
FSK  
Specifies the type of caller ID being used  
Note: FSK is the factory default setting.  
DTMF  
Fax Send Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,  
but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
143  
Menu item  
Description  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Folio  
Statement  
A4  
A5  
A6  
Oficio (Mexico)  
JIS B5  
4 x 6  
3 x 5  
ID Card  
Universal  
Custom Scan Size  
Business Card  
Duplex  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Content  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Dial Prefix  
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers  
<none>  
Automatic Redial  
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number  
0–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Redial Frequency  
Specifies the number of minutes between redials  
1–200  
Note: 3 minutes is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
144  
Menu item  
Description  
Behind a PABX  
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone  
Yes  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Enable ECM  
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable Fax Scans  
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Driver to fax  
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Dial Mode  
Tone  
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse  
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.  
Pulse  
Max Speed  
2400  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent  
Note: 33600 baud is the factory default setting.  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Enable Color Fax Scans  
Enables color faxing  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white  
Faxes  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
145  
Fax Receive Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Fax Receive  
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Rings to Answer  
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job  
1–25  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Answer  
Allows the printer to answer an incoming fax job  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Manual Answer Code  
Lets you enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax  
1–9  
Notes:  
This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone  
9 is the factory default setting  
Auto Reduction  
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax  
source  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Paper Source  
Specifiesthepapersourceselectedtosupplypaperfortheprinterto printanincoming  
fax  
Auto Size Match  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Single Sheet Feeder  
MultiPage Feeder  
Sides  
On  
Enables duplex (two-sided) printing for incoming fax jobs  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Fax Footer  
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Max Speed  
2400  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received  
Note: 33600 (baud) is the factory default setting.  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Block No Name Fax  
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
146  
Fax Log Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job  
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Receive Error Log  
Print Never  
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error  
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.  
Print on Error  
Auto Print Logs  
Enables automatic printing of fax logs  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Log Paper Source  
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Logs Display  
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name  
Remote Station Name  
Dialed Number  
Note: “Remote Station Name” is the factory default setting.  
Enable Job Log  
Enables access to the Fax Job log  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable Call Log  
Enables access to the Fax Call log  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Speaker Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Speaker Mode  
Always Off  
Notes:  
Always Off turns the speaker off.  
On until Connected  
Always On  
“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and  
issues a noise until the fax connection is made.  
Always On turns the speaker on.  
Speaker Volume  
High  
Controls the volume setting  
Note: High is the factory default setting.  
Medium  
Low  
Ringer Volume  
Controls the ringer volume for the fax speaker  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
147  
Distinctive Rings  
Menu item  
Description  
Single Ring  
Answers calls with a onering pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Double Ring  
Answers calls with a doublering pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Triple Ring  
Triple Ring answers calls with a triplering pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Flash Drive menu  
Flash Drive menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable Drive  
Enable  
Enables or disables the USB port on the front of the printer  
Notes:  
Disable  
Certain options are not available on selected printer models.  
Enable is the factory default setting  
Update Code  
Enable  
Enables or disables the ability of the printer to update its firmware code from a USB device  
Note: Enable is the factory default setting  
Disable  
Scan Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
Specifies the format of the file  
PDF (.pdf)  
TIFF (.tif)  
JPEG (.jpg)  
Note: PDF is the factory default setting.  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Content  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB  
Notes:  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
148  
Menu item  
Description  
Color  
Gray  
Color  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Resolution  
75  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
149  
Menu item  
Description  
JPEG Quality Text or Text/Photo  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the  
quality of the image.  
5–90  
Notes:  
75 is the factory default setting.  
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
Photo JPEG Quality  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
5–90  
Notes:  
50 is the factory default setting.  
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
Use MultiPage TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiplepage TIFF files. For a  
multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,  
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
On is the factory default setting.  
This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Scan bit Depth  
8 bit  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image  
1–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Print Settings  
Menu item  
Copies  
Description  
Specifies the number of copies to print  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
150  
Menu item  
Description  
Sides (Duplex)  
2 sided  
Enables duplex (two-sided) printing  
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.  
1 sided  
Print Settings  
Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Printer Language  
PS Emulation  
Determines which printer language the print server uses to send data to the  
printer  
PCL Emulation  
PPDS Emulation  
Note: PS is the factory default setting.  
Print Area  
Normal  
Determines the print area on paper  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Fit to Page  
Whole Page  
Download Target  
RAM  
Collects permanent resources that have been downloaded on the printer and  
automatically writes them to the flash drive  
Flash  
Note: RAM is the factory default setting.  
Resource Save  
Saves the permanently downloaded resources  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Finishing menu  
Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sides  
Specifies whether duplex (2sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs  
2 Sided  
1 Sided  
Note: 1 Sided is the factory default setting.  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the  
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages  
and the top edge of landscape pages.  
Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages  
and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
151  
Menu item  
Description  
Copies  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
1–999  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: “Do Not Print” is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
On  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Notes:  
Off  
Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copy  
menu setting.  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
None is the factory default setting.  
Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if  
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between  
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's, all page 2's, and so on.  
Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This  
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a  
document for notes.  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
MultiPage Feeder  
NUp  
Off  
Specifies that multiplepage images are printed on one side of a sheet of paper  
Notes:  
2 Up  
4 Up  
6 Up  
9 Up  
16 Up  
The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side  
Off is the factory default setting.  
NUp Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies how the page images appear on the physical page  
Note: Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
152  
Menu item  
Description  
Orientation  
Auto  
Specifies the orientation of a multiplepage sheet  
Notes:  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and  
landscape.  
Long Edge uses landscape.  
Short Edge uses portrait.  
NUp Border  
None  
Prints a border around each page image  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Solid  
Quality menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Color Correction  
Auto  
Adjusts the color output on the printed page  
Notes:  
Off  
Manual  
Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables  
to each object on the printed page.  
Off turns off color correction.  
Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from  
the Manual Color menu.  
Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that  
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.  
Print Resolution  
4800 CQ  
Specifies the printed output resolution  
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.  
1200 dpi  
Toner Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the printed output  
1–5  
Notes:  
4 is the factory default setting.  
Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.  
Enhance Fine Lines  
Creates smoother lines with sharper edges  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
This feature improves the printed output of CAD-type drawings (e.g. circuit  
diagrams, architectural prints, etc.).  
Color Saver  
Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used  
for text is not reduced.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
On overrides Toner Darkness settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
153  
Menu item  
Description  
RGB Brightness  
Adjusts brightness in color outputs  
6 to +6  
Notes:  
0 is the factory default setting.  
This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.  
RGB Contrast  
Adjusts contrast in color outputs  
0–5  
Notes:  
0 is the factory default setting.  
This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.  
RGB Saturation  
Adjusts saturation in color outputs  
0–5  
Notes:  
0 is the factory default setting.  
This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.  
Color Balance  
Cyan  
Lets you make subtle color adjustments to the printer output by individually altering  
the amount of toner being used for each color plane. Specifies the amount of color from  
5 to +5.  
Magenta  
Yellow  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Black  
Reset Defaults  
Color Samples  
sRGB Display  
sRGB Vivid  
Display—True Black  
Vivid  
Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the  
printer  
Notes:  
Selecting any setting prints the sample.  
Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK  
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help  
decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.  
Off—RGB  
US CMYK  
Euro CMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off—CMYK  
From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete  
list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
154  
Menu item  
Description  
Manual Color (RGB)  
RGB Image  
Customizes the RGB color conversions. The values for each setting are:  
Vivid  
RGB Text  
RGB Graphics  
sRGB Display  
Display—True Black  
sRGB Vivid  
Off  
Notes:  
Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated  
colors.  
sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color  
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer  
monitor.  
Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner  
for neutral gray colors.  
sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB  
Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business  
graphics and text.  
Off turns off color conversion.  
Manual Color (CMYK)  
CMYK Image  
Customizes the CMYK color conversions. The values for each setting are:  
USCMYK  
EuroCMYK  
Vivid CMYK  
Off  
CMYK Text  
CMYK Graphics  
Notes:  
USCMYK is the US factory default setting  
EuroCMYK is the International factory default setting  
Vivid CMYK applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more  
saturated colors.  
Off turns off color conversion.  
Color Adjust  
Initiates an automatic color adjust calibration.  
Utilities menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Hex Trace  
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem  
Activate  
Notes:  
When Hex Trace is activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in  
hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not  
executed.  
To exit Hex Trace, turn the printer off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
155  
Menu item  
Description  
Coverage Estimator  
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black  
on a page. The estimate is printed on a separator page.  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
This menu item is not available on selected printer models.  
PDF menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Scale to Fit  
Scales page content to fit the selected page size  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Yes  
Annotations  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
PostScript menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print PS Error  
Prints a page containing the PostScript error  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Image Smoothing  
Enhances the contrast and sharpness of lowresolution images and smooths  
their color transitions  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in  
resolution.  
PCL Emul menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Source  
Resident  
Download  
All  
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item  
Notes:  
Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of  
fonts downloaded into RAM.  
Download shows all the fonts downloaded into RAM.  
All shows all fonts available to any option.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding printer menus  
156  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Name  
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored  
RO Courier  
Notes:  
RO Courier is the factory default setting.  
RO Courier shows the font name, font ID, and storage location in the  
printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, and D  
for Download.  
Symbol Set  
10U PC8  
Specifies the symbol set for each font name  
Notes:  
12U PC850  
10U PC8 is the US factory default setting.  
12U PC850 is the international factory default setting.  
A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,  
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or  
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the  
supported symbol sets are shown.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Point Size  
Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts  
Notes:  
1.00–1008.00  
12 is the factory default setting.  
Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point  
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.  
Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25point increments.  
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Pitch  
0.08–100  
10 is the factory default setting.  
Pitch refers to the number of fixedspace characters per inch (cpi).  
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01cpi increments.  
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but  
cannot be changed.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page  
Notes:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.  
Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page  
Lines per Page  
Notes:  
1–255  
60  
64  
60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international factory default  
setting.  
The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the  
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired  
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
157  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL Emulation Settings  
A4 Width  
Sets the printer to print on A4size paper  
Notes:  
198 mm  
203 mm  
198 mm is the factory default setting.  
The 203mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of  
eighty 10pitch characters.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after  
a line feed (LF) control command  
Auto CR after LF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a  
carriage return (CR) control command  
Auto LF after CR  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Off is the factory default setting.  
Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.  
Tray Renumber  
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use  
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders  
Assign MP Feeder  
Off  
Notes:  
None  
0–199  
Assign Tray <x>  
Off is the factory default setting.  
None is not an available selection. It is displayed only when it is selected  
by the PCL 5 interpreter.  
Off  
None  
0–199  
None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.  
0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.  
Assign Manual Paper  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Assign Man Env  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Tray Renumber  
View Factory Def  
None  
Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder  
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings  
Tray Renumber  
Restore Defaults  
Yes  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
158  
Image menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Auto Fit  
On  
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation  
Notes:  
Off  
On is the factory default setting.  
The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.  
Invert  
On  
Inverts bitonal monochrome images  
Notes:  
Off  
Off is the factory default setting.  
The font size can be increased in 1point increments.  
This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.  
Scaling  
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size  
Anchor Top Left  
Best Fit  
Note: Best Fit is the factory default setting.  
Anchor Center  
Fit Height/Width  
Fit Height  
Fit Width  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the image orientation  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Rev Portrait  
Rev Landscape  
PictBridge menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Photo Size  
Auto  
Controls the printed size of each photo printed from a PictBridgeenabled device  
Notes:  
L
2L  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
If both the printer and the PictBridgeenabled camera have a value for this  
Hagaki Postcard  
Card Size  
100 x 150 mm  
4 x 6 in  
8 x 10 in  
Letter  
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.  
A4  
A5  
JIS B5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding printer menus  
159  
Menu item  
Description  
Layout  
Auto  
Determines the maximum number of images that can print on one side of paper  
Notes:  
Off  
2 Up  
3 Up  
4 Up  
Auto is the factory default setting.  
If both the printer and the PictBridgeenabled camera have a value for this  
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.  
6 Up  
9 Up  
12 Up  
16 Up  
Index Print  
Quality  
Normal  
Draft  
Determines which resolution, toner darkness, and color saver values the device uses  
when printing photos sent from a PictBridgeenabled device  
Notes:  
Fine  
Normal is the factory default setting.  
If both the printer and the PictBridgeenabled camera have a value for this  
setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.  
Paper Source  
MP Feeder  
Tray <x>  
Identifies the printer default input source when printing photos from a  
PictBridgeenabled device  
Notes:  
Manual Paper  
MP Feeder is the factory default setting.  
A photo size larger than the size of the media installed in the printer input  
source cannot be selected.  
Set Date and Time  
Menu item  
Description  
View Date/Time  
Displays the time in YYYYMMDD HH:MM format  
Note: This is a view only screen.  
Set Date/Time  
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard  
Notes:  
Yes  
No  
Yes is the factory default setting.  
After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country/Region  
select screen, the default becomes No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer menus  
160  
Menu item  
Description  
Time Zone (North, Central, and  
South America)  
Specifies the time zone for the fax  
Note: * indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings  
Time Start and End times.  
Hawaii *  
Alaska  
Tijuana (PST)  
USA/Canada PST  
USA/Canada MST  
USA/Canada CST  
USA/Canada EST  
Canada AST  
Caracas (VET)  
Newfoundland (NST)  
Brasilia (BRT)  
Time Zone (Europe and Africa)  
Azores (AZOT)  
Praia (CVT) *  
Specifies the time zone for the fax  
Note: * indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings  
Time Start and End times.  
GMT (*)  
Dublin, Ireland  
London (BST)  
Western Europe  
Central Europe  
Eastern Europe  
Cairo (EET)  
Pretoria (SAST) *  
Moscow (MSK)  
Time Zone (Asia)  
Jerusalem (IST)  
Abu Dhabi GIST)*  
Kabul (AFT) *  
Specifies the time zone for the fax  
Note: * indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings  
Time Start and End times.  
Islamabad (PKT) *  
New Delhi (IST) *  
Kathmandu (NPT) *  
Astana (ALMT) *  
Yangon (MMT) *  
Bangkok (ICT) *  
Beijing (CST) *  
Seoul (KST) *  
Tokyo (JST) *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
161  
Menu item  
Description  
Time Zone (Australia and the  
Pacific region)  
Specifies the time zone for the fax  
Note: * indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings  
Time Start and End times.  
Australia WST  
Australia CST Darwin (CST) *  
Australia EST  
Queensland (EST) *  
Tasmania (EST)  
Wellington (NZST)  
Not Listed  
Observe DST  
Accommodates Daylight Savings Time changes  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable NTP  
Lets the printer clock synchronize with the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer messages  
162  
Understanding printer messages  
List of status and error messages  
Access USB after scan  
A USB drive was inserted into the printer while the printer was scanning. From the keypad, press 1 to open the drive  
after scanning, or press 2 to ignore the USB drive.  
Access USB now  
A USB drive was inserted into the printer while the printer was setting up a job (copy, fax, email, or FTP) or while in  
the menus. From the keypad, press 1 to release job resources and access the USB drive directly, or press 2 to ignore  
the USB drive and return to the job being set up.  
Busy  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Calibrating  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Call complete  
A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.  
Cancel not available  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Canceling  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Check Config ID  
The printer configuration ID is invalid. Contact Customer Support.  
Clock battery  
The realtime clock in the printer has a malfunctioning battery. This message appears until the realtime clock battery  
is replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Understanding printer messages  
163  
Close door  
Close the upper and lower doors.  
<color> Low  
Replace the toner cartridge, and then wait for the message to clear.  
Dialing  
A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialingappears. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
DO NOT TOUCH  
The printer is receiving a code to update a file. Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off or touch the printer while this message appears on the display.  
Fax complete  
A fax that was sent or received is complete. Wait for the message to clear.  
Fax failed  
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Flushing buffer  
Wait for the message to clear.  
File corrupt  
A file with a valid extension is detected, but the actual file type does not match the extension, or the file is corrupt.  
Hex Trace  
The printer is in Hex Trace mode.  
With Hex Trace selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. This is used  
to help isolate the source of a print job problem.  
Note: Control codes are not executed.  
To exit Hex Trace, turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
Imaging Kit  
Replace the imaging kit, and then press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Understanding printer messages  
164  
Incoming call  
This message appears when using manual fax mode. Press  
to print a black only fax or  
to print a color fax.  
Insert Tray <x>  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Invalid Engine Code  
The engine code is invalid. Contact Customer Support.  
Invalid Network Code  
The network code is invalid. Contact Customer Support.  
LADP connection error  
The LADP server information is present but the printer is unable to communicate with the server, or the communication  
ended before the return of the search results.  
Wait for the message to clear and try searching for the address again.  
Contact your system support person.  
Line busy  
A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.  
Load <src> with <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
Load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.  
Press  
, and then press  
to cancel printing.  
Load single sheet feeder with <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
Load the manual feeder with the correct paper type and size.  
If no paper is in the manual feeder, load a sheet, and then press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Press  
The printer manually overrides the manual request, and then the job prints from an automatic source.  
Press , and then press to cancel printing.  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Define a name for each custom type (Custom 1–6) using the MarkVision utility. When the printer is prompting for  
one of the custom types, which has been named, then only the custom name is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Understanding printer messages  
165  
Maintenance  
The printer needs maintenance. Call for service.  
Memory full, cannot send faxes  
The printer fax memory is full. Press  
to clear the message and cancel the fax.  
Reduce the fax resolution and try to send the fax again.  
Reduce the number of pages in the fax and try to send the fax again.  
Menus disabled  
The printer menus are disabled. The printer settings cannot be changed from the printer control panel. Contact your  
system support person for help.  
Note: When menus are disabled, it is still possible to cancel a print job.  
No analog phone line  
The analog phone line was not detected; the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.  
No answer  
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.  
No dial tone  
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.  
No recognized file types  
Either there are no files saved on the USB drive, or the files saved are not supported. Convert files to any of the following  
supported file types: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, or .dcx.  
PC Kit Life Warning  
This is the final warning message for the photoconductor kit. The photoconductor kit is near exhaustion. The printer  
continues printing unless the value for the Cartridge Alarm is changed from the printer control panel or set to On from  
the Supply Notifications Web page (located on the Embedded Web Server).  
If the setting is On, then the printer stops printing. Press  
to select Continue. The printer continues to print until  
the photoconductor kit is completely exhausted. When the photoconductor kit is exhausted, replace it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Understanding printer messages  
166  
Phone in Use  
The telephone attached to the printer is in use, or its handset is off the cradle.  
1 Place the handset on the telephone cradle.  
2 Press  
to send a black only fax or  
to send a color fax.  
3 Enter the fax number.  
Picture too large  
The photo sent to the printer is larger than the current paper size. Press the arrow buttons until Closest photo  
sizeor Fit to pageappears, and then press  
.
Power Saver  
The printer is saving power while it waits for the next print job.  
Send a job to print.  
Touch  
to warm the printer to normal operating temperature. Afterwards, Readyappears.  
Printing error  
A job sent from a USB drive was not successfully received. Wait for the message to clear and then try sending the job  
again.  
Programming Code  
The printer is receiving a file that is a code update. Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn the printer off while this message appears on the display.  
Reading data  
A PictBridge enabled device is connected, and the printer is reading data from the device. Wait for the message to  
clear.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not remove the device or turn the printer power off while Reading data  
appears on the display.  
Reading error (Remove drive)  
The printer was reading information from a USB drive and encountered an error. The USB drive must be removed from  
the printer to clear the message.  
Ready  
The printer is ready to receive print jobs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Understanding printer messages  
167  
Receiving pXX  
The printer is receiving a fax. pXXrepresents the number of pages received. Wait for the message to clear.  
Reload printed pages in Tray <x>  
Press  
to clear the message and continue processing the second side of the sheet.  
Press  
, and then press to cancel printing.  
Remote Management Active  
The printer is offline while it configures settings. Wait for the message to clear.  
Remove originals from the scanner ADF  
Remove the paper from the ADF to clear the message and continue printing.  
Remove packaging material  
Check for and remove any packaging materials from the toner cartridges.  
Remove paper from standard output bin  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
Replace <color> cartridge  
Replace the toner cartridge, and then press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Replace PC Kit  
This is the early warning message for the photoconductor kit. The printer continues printing unless the value for the  
Cartridge Alarm is changed from the printer control panel or set to On from the Supply Notifications Web page (located  
on the Embedded Web Server).  
If the setting is On, then the printer stops printing. Press  
to select Continueand continue printing.  
When the PC Kit Life Warningappears, order a new photoconductor kit.  
Scan Document Too Long  
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Press  
message.  
, and then press  
to cancel printing and clear the  
Scan to USB failed  
An attempt to create a file on the USB drive failed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Understanding printer messages  
168  
Try one or more of the following:  
Resend the job.  
Reduce the scan resolution, and then try sending the job again.  
Remove the USB drive, reconnect it, and then try sending the job again.  
Scanner ADF Cover Open  
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.  
Sending pXX  
The printer is sending a fax. pXXrepresents the number of pages received. Wait for the message to clear.  
Standard Exit Bin Full  
Empty the standard exit bin to clear the message and continue printing.  
Tray <x> Empty  
Try one or more of the following:  
Load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.  
Press  
, and then press  
to cancel the current job.  
Tray <x> Low  
Wait until the printer is not printing, and then load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.  
Tray <x> Missing  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Unsupported USB device, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB device.  
Unsupported USB hub, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.  
Unsupported Mode  
Remove the camera, and then change the mode to PictBridge. Reconnect the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Understanding printer messages  
169  
USB drive disabled  
A USB drive was inserted into the printer, and the port is disabled. Contact your system support person.  
Use camera controls to print  
A recognized PictBridgecompatible camera is attached to the printer.  
Waiting  
The printer has received data to print, but is waiting for an EndofJob command, a Form Feed command, or additional  
data.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to print the contents of the buffer.  
Cancel the current print job.  
Waiting, too many events  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn the printer off while this message appears on the display.  
30.yy <color> cartridge missing  
Insert the missing toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing.  
31.yy Defective <color> Cartridge  
Replace the defective toner cartridge with a new one.  
31 Defective Imaging Kit  
Replace the imaging kit.  
32.yy Replace Unsupported <color> Cartridge  
Replace the unsupported toner cartridge with a supported one.  
34 Short paper  
The printer paper size setting did not match the length of the paper that entered the printer.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
, and then press to cancel printing.  
Press  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the size of the paper in the tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Understanding printer messages  
170  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature  
The printer lacks sufficient memory to save settings. Install additional memory, or press  
and continue printing.  
to disable Resource Save  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job  
The printer prints the pages that were spooled prior to the collation message and collates the remainder of the print  
job.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
, and then press to cancel printing.  
Press  
38 Memory Full  
The printer does not have enough memory available to continue printing. You cannot press  
Try one or more of the following:  
because of this.  
Press  
, and then press  
to cancel printing.  
Simplify the print job by reducing the amount of text or graphics on a page and deleting unnecessary downloaded  
fonts or macros.  
Install additional printer memory.  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed  
The page is too complex to print. Press  
, and then press  
to cancel printing.  
40 <color> Invalid refill, change cartridge  
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.  
50 PPDS Font Error  
The printer has encountered a font error because a specific font may not be installed.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
The printer cannot find the requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer  
will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.  
Press  
, and then press  
to cancel printing.  
51 Defective flash detected  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Understanding printer messages  
171  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.  
Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory.  
Press  
, and then press  
to cancel printing.  
53 Unformatted flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Format the flash memory. If the message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.  
54 Network <x> Software Error  
The printer detects that a network port is installed, but cannot communicate with it. The printer disables all  
communication to the associated network interface.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
56 Standard USB Port Disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port. Press  
Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
58 Too many flash options installed  
Too many optional flash memory cards or too many optional firmware cards are installed on the printer.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Remove extra flash options:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove extra flash options.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Understanding printer messages  
172  
58 Too many trays attached  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional trays.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Input config error  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove and reconfigure the additional trays.  
Note: If you installed both the optional 550sheet tray and the 650sheet duo drawer, then the optional  
550sheet tray must be installed as the first tray (configuring from the bottom up).  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
59 Incompatible tray <x>  
Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.  
Try one or more of the following:  
Remove the specified tray.  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.  
82 Replace waste toner box  
Replace the waste toner bottle. For more information, see “Replacing the waste toner bottle” on page 180.  
82.yy Waste toner box missing  
Replace the waste toner bottle, and then press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
88.yy <color> Cartridge is low  
Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
88.yy Replace <color> Cartridge  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Understanding printer messages  
173  
150 displayed  
The USB drive contains more than 150 files; only 150 files will be displayed.  
200.yy Paper jam <area name>  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
201.yy Paper jam <area name>  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Remove the jammed paper below the fuser.  
3 Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
202.yy Paper jam <area name>  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Remove the jammed paper from the fuser.  
3 Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
230.yy Paper jam <area name>  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.  
3 Close the front door.  
4 Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
Note: When there is more than one jam, the message displays the number of pages jammed.  
235 Paper Jam Check Duplex  
An unsupported paper size is jammed in the duplex unit.  
1 Open the front door  
2 Remove the jam.  
3 Load the tray with the correct paper size.  
4 Press  
to continue printing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Understanding printer messages  
174  
24x Paper Jam Check Tray <x>  
1 Pull the tray out.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
3 Insert the tray.  
If all jams are cleared, the printer resumes printing.  
Note: When there is more than one jam, the message indicates the number of pages jammed.  
250.yy Paper jam <area name>  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.  
3 Hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper from inside the fuser.  
4 Close the fuser cover, and then close the front door.  
5 Press  
to clear the message and continue printing.  
290–292 ADF Scanning Jams  
The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the ADF.  
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.  
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.  
2 Flex and fan the pages.  
3 Place the pages in the ADF.  
4 Adjust the ADF guides.  
5 From the printer control panel, press  
to start a black only job or  
to start a color job.  
293 Paper Missing  
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF, but there is no paper in the ADF.  
Note: The message clears when the pages are placed in the ADF.  
1 Flex and fan the pages.  
2 Place the pages in the ADF.  
3 Adjust the ADF guides.  
4 From the printer control panel, press  
to start a black only job or  
to start a color job.  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open  
Close the scanner cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Understanding printer messages  
175  
294 ADF Jam  
This jam location may also be identified as 294.04 Duplex Sensor Off Jam, 294.05 Scan Sensor Off  
Jam, or 294.06 ADF Backfeed Jam. To clear this jam:  
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.  
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.  
2 Flex and fan the pages.  
3 Place the pages in the ADF.  
4 Adjust the ADF guides.  
5 From the printer control panel, press  
to start a black only job or  
to start a color job.  
840.01 Scanner Disabled  
This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person.  
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled  
This message indicates the printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it.  
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.  
2 Turn the printer off.  
3 Wait 15 seconds and then turn the printer on.  
4 Place the document in the ADF.  
5 Press  
to start a black only job or  
to start a color job.  
Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, contact your system support person.  
940.01  
Press down on the cyan toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds,  
and then turn the printer back on  
941.01  
Press down on the magenta toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10  
seconds, and then turn the printer back on.  
942.01  
Press down on the yellow toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10  
seconds, and then turn the printer back on  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Understanding printer messages  
176  
943.01  
Press down on the black toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds,  
and then turn the printer back on  
940.02  
The cyan toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.  
941.02  
The magenta toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.  
942.02  
The yellow toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.  
943.02  
The black toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.  
900–999 Service <message>  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Maintaining the printer  
177  
Maintaining the printer  
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.  
Storing supplies  
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you  
are ready to use them.  
Do not expose supplies to:  
Direct sunlight  
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)  
High humidity above 80%  
Salty air  
Corrosive gases  
Heavy dust  
Checking the status of supplies  
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel  
You can check the status of printer supplies by printing a menu settings page:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reportsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Menu Settings Pageappears, and then press  
.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in  
the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Maintaining the printer  
178  
Ordering supplies  
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies  
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place  
where you purchased the printer.  
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letteror A4size plain paper.  
Ordering toner cartridges  
When 88 Cyan Cartridge Low, 88 Magenta Cartridge Low, 88 Yellow Cartridge Low, or 88  
Black Cartridge lowappears, order a new cartridge.  
When 88 Replace Cyan Cartridge, 88 Replace Magenta Cartridge, 88 Replace Yellow  
Cartridge, or 88 Replace Black Cartridgeappears, you must replace the specified toner cartridge.  
Part name  
Part number  
C540, C543, and X543 series C544, X544, and X546 series  
Black Return Program Toner  
Cartridge  
C540A1KG  
Cyan Return Program Toner  
Cartridge  
C540A1CG  
C540A1MG  
C540A1YG  
C540H1KG  
C540H1CG  
C540H1MG  
C540H1YG  
C540H2KG  
C540H2CG  
C540H2MG  
C540H2YG  
C544X1KG  
C544X1CG  
Magenta Return Program  
Toner Cartridge  
YellowReturn Program Toner  
Cartridge  
Black High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Cyan High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Magenta High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Yellow High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Black High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Cyan High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Magenta High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Yellow High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Black Extra High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Cyan Extra High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the printer  
179  
Part name  
Part number  
C540, C543, and X543 series C544, X544, and X546 series  
Magenta Extra High Yield  
Return Program Toner  
Cartridge  
C544X1MG  
Not supported  
Yellow Extra High Yield  
Return Program Toner  
Cartridge  
C544X1YG  
Not supported  
Black Extra High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
C544X2KG  
C544X2CG  
C544X2MG  
C544X2YG  
C546U1KG  
C546U2KG  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Not supported  
Cyan Extra High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Magenta Extra High Yield  
Toner Cartridge  
Yellow Extra High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Black Extra High Yield Return  
Program Toner Cartridge  
Black Extra High Yield Toner  
Cartridge  
Ordering imaging kits  
Part name  
Part number  
Black and color imaging kit  
Black imaging kit  
C540X74G  
C540X71G  
Ordering a waste toner bottle  
When 82 Replace Waste Tonerappears, order a replacement waste toner bottle. The waste toner bottle must  
be replaced when 82 Replace Waste Tonerappears.  
Part name  
Part number  
Waste toner bottle  
C540X75G  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the printer  
180  
Replacing supplies  
Replacing the waste toner bottle  
Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 Replace waste tonerappears. The printer will not continue printing  
until the waste toner bottle is replaced.  
1 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.  
2 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1
@
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
3DEF  
6MNO  
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
8TU  
V
9
W
XY  
*
Z
0
#
3 Open the top door.  
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the printer  
181  
4 Remove the right side cover.  
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.  
6 Place the waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
182  
7 Insert the new waste toner bottle.  
8 Replace the right side cover.  
9 Close the top door.  
K
M
K
C
Y
C
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
183  
10 Close the front door.  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
Replacing a black imaging kit  
Replace the black imaging kit when Replace Black Imaging Kitappears.  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1
@
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
DEF  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
5JKL  
8TUV  
7
PQ  
RS  
*
0
#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
184  
2 Open the top door.  
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
Y
3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.  
4 Remove the right side cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
185  
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.  
6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.  
7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the green handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
186  
8 Remove the yellow, cyan, and magenta developer units.  
9 Unpack the replacement black imaging kit.  
Leave the packaging on the black developer unit.  
10 Gently shake the black developer unit side to side.  
11 Remove the red shipping cover from the black developer unit.  
12 Insert the black developer unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
187  
13 Replace the yellow, cyan, and magenta developer units.  
Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into a matching color slot.  
14 Place the used black imaging kit in the enclosed package.  
15 Align and insert the imaging kit.  
16 Rotate the blue levers down until the imaging kit drops into place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
188  
17 Replace the waste toner bottle.  
18 Replace the right side cover.  
19 Replace the toner cartridges.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
189  
20 Close the top door.  
K
M
K
C
Y
C
Y
21 Close the front door.  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
Replacing a black and color imaging kit  
Replace the black and color imaging kit when Replace Color Imaging Kitappears.  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
190  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MNO  
8TU  
V
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
2 Open the top door.  
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
Y
3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
191  
4 Remove the right side cover.  
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and remove it.  
6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.  
7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the green handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
192  
8 Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.  
Leave the packaging on the developer units.  
9 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side to side.  
10 Remove the red shipping cover from the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.  
11 Insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.  
12 Place the used black and color imaging kit in the enclosed package.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
193  
13 Align and insert the imaging kit.  
14 Replace the waste toner bottle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
194  
15 Replace the right side cover.  
16 Replace the toner cartridges.  
17 Close the top door.  
K
M
K
C
Y
C
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
195  
18 Close the front door.  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
Replacing a toner cartridge  
Replace the specified toner cartridge (yellow, cyan, magenta, or black) when 88 Replace <color>  
Cartridgeappears. The printer will not continue printing until the specified cartridge is replaced.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a nonLexmark toner cartridge is not covered under  
warranty.  
Note: Degraded print quality may result from using nonLexmark toner cartridges.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyor 88 Replace <color> Cartridgeappears.  
2 Unpack the new cartridge, and set it near the printer.  
3 Open the top door.  
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
196  
4 Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.  
5 Align the new toner cartridge, and then press down until it is all the way into the slot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
197  
6 Close the top door.  
K
M
K
C
Y
C
Y
Replacing a developer unit  
Replace a developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.  
1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1
@
!.  
2ABC  
4GHI  
DEF  
6MNO  
9WXYZ  
5JKL  
8TUV  
7
PQ  
RS  
*
0
#
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
198  
2 Open the top door.  
K
M
K
C
M
Y
C
Y
3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.  
4 Remove the right side cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
199  
5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.  
6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.  
7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
200  
8 Remove the used developer unit.  
9 Place the used developer in the enclosed package.  
10 Unpack the replacement developer unit.  
Leave the packaging on the developer unit.  
11 Gently shake the developer unit side to side.  
12 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.  
13 Insert the developer unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
201  
14 Align and insert the imaging kit.  
15 Replace the waste toner bottle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
202  
16 Replace the right side cover.  
17 Replace the toner cartridges.  
18 Close the top door.  
K
M
K
C
Y
C
Y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintaining the printer  
203  
19 Close the front door.  
1
@
!.  
2AB  
C
4GH  
I
3DE  
F
5JK  
L
7
PQ  
RS  
6MN  
O
8TU  
V
9WX  
YZ  
*
0
#
Cleaning the exterior of the printer  
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.  
2 Remove paper from the standard exit tray.  
3 Dampen a clean, lintfree cloth with water.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of  
the printer.  
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit tray.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.  
5 Make sure the standard exit tray is dry before beginning a new print job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
204  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.  
Note: Clean both areas of the scanner glass and both white underside areas.  
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2 Open the scanner cover.  
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
White underside ADF cover  
White underside scanner glass cover  
Scanner glass  
ADF glass  
3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.  
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.  
5 Close the scanner cover.  
Moving the printer  
Before moving the printer  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to lift it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or  
printer damage:  
Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.  
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining the printer  
205  
Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same  
time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer  
warranty.  
Moving the printer to another location  
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:  
Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart  
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.  
Keep the printer in an upright position.  
Avoid severe jarring movements.  
Shipping the printer  
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administrative support  
206  
Administrative support  
Finding advanced networking and administrator information  
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking  
Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark  
Restoring the factory default settings  
Menu settings marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the active settings. You can restore the original printer settings,  
often referred to as the factory default settings.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the printer control panel, press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until General Settingsappears, and then press  
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Factory Defaultsappears, and then press  
6 Press the arrow buttons until Restore Nowappears, and then press  
.
Submitting changesappears briefly.  
7 Press  
, and then press  
until Readyappears.  
The following factory default settings are restored:  
All downloaded resources in the printer memory are deleted. This includes fonts, macros, and symbol sets.  
All settings return to the factory default settings except Printer Languagein the Setup menu and custom  
settings in the Network and USB menus.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions:  
Configuring printer settings  
Checking the status of the printer supplies  
Configuring network settings  
Viewing reports  
Restoring the factory default settings  
Viewing the virtual display  
Setting Web page password protect  
Setting Panel PIN protect  
Setting the date and time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Administrative support  
207  
To access the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click one of the tabs to access information about the printer, change settings, or view a report.  
Note: If the printer is connected to a computer by a USB or parallel cable, then open the Local Printer Settings Utility  
for Windows or Printer Settings for Macintosh to access printer menus.  
Setting up email alerts  
You can have the printer send you an email when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed,  
added, or unjammed.  
To set up email alerts:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:  
View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Email Alert Setup.  
4 Select the items for notification and type in the email addresses that you want to receive email alerts.  
5 Click Submit.  
Note: See your system support person to set up the email server.  
Viewing reports  
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the  
printer, the network, and supplies.  
To view reports from a network printer:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:  
View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.  
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
208  
Troubleshooting  
Solving basic printer problems  
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:  
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.  
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
All options are properly installed.  
The printer driver settings are correct.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the  
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.  
Solving printing problems  
Multiplelanguage PDFs do not print  
The documents contain unavailable fonts.  
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.  
2 Click the printer icon.  
The Print dialog appears.  
3 Select Print as image.  
4 Click OK.  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds  
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.  
If Performing Self Testand Readydo not appear, turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears  
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices, visit  
the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Troubleshooting  
209  
Jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT  
Make sure Readyor Power Saverappears on the display before sending a job to print. Press  
to return the  
printer to the Readystate.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin, and then press  
.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK  
Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the  
network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make  
sure the network is functioning correctly.  
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB OR ETHERNET CABLE  
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED  
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.  
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.  
Job takes longer than expected to print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.  
CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
.
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Setup Menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Recoveryappears, and then press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
210  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Page Protectappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until Offappears, and then press  
.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Incorrect or strange characters print  
The print job may not have terminated properly. Turn the printer off and back on.  
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hexappears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace  
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.  
Tray linking does not work  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
Note: The paper trays, manual feeder, and multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must  
set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER  
Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.  
Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.  
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS  
Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.  
If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Large jobs do not collate  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON  
From the printer control panel Finishing menu, Print Properties, or the Print dialog, set Collate to On.  
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of  
images, and the number of pages in the job.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
211  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY  
Add printer memory.  
Unexpected page breaks occur  
Increase the Print Timeout value:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settingsappears, and then press  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Timeoutsappears, and then press  
.
.
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Print Timeoutappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the desired value appears, and then press  
.
Solving copy problems  
Copier does not respond  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Scanner unit does not close  
Make sure there are no obstructions:  
1 Open the scanner cover.  
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.  
3 Close the scanner cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
212  
Poor copy quality  
These are some examples of poor copy quality:  
Blank pages  
Checkerboard pattern  
Distorted graphics or pictures  
Missing characters  
Faded print  
Dark print  
Skewed lines  
Smudges  
Streaks  
Unexpected characters  
White lines in print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lintfree cloth dampened with water.  
THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK  
Adjust the copy darkness setting.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
213  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND  
Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.  
Change the Background Removal setting in the Copy Settings menu.  
PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT  
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.  
Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.  
From the printer control panel, press the Scale button and adjust the setting.  
TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING  
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text or Text/Photo.  
THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED  
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.  
From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button and change to a darker setting.  
Partial document or photo copies  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
Solving scanner problems  
Checking an unresponsive scanner  
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:  
The printer is turned on.  
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
214  
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem  
with the scanner.  
Scan was not successful  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM  
Turn off and then restart the computer.  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING  
Close all programs not being used.  
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH  
Select a lower scan resolution.  
Poor scanned image quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lintfree cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the  
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION  
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
215  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Partial document or photo scans  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Cannot scan from a computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
Solving fax problems  
Caller ID is not shown  
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.  
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings  
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on  
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to  
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
216  
Cannot send or receive a fax  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:  
Telephone  
Handset  
Answering machine  
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK  
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.  
2 Listen for a dial tone.  
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.  
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.  
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.  
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST  
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services  
can be used.  
If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface  
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN  
provider.  
If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,  
contact your DSL provider.  
If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.  
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.  
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE  
Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.  
If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending  
a fax.  
If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
217  
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT  
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering  
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.  
CHECK FOR JAMS  
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.  
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING  
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone  
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.  
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION  
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail  
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.  
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL  
1 Dial the fax number.  
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.  
Can send but not receive faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS  
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension  
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep  
the Ring Delay setting at 4.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.  
6 Click Submit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
218  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
88 <color> toner lowappears when the toner is low.  
Can receive but not send faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS IN FAX MODE  
From the printer control panel, press the Fax button to put the printer in Fax mode.  
MAKE SURE THE DOCUMENT IS LOADED PROPERLY  
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left  
corner.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY  
Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.  
As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.  
Received fax has poor print quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RESEND THE DOCUMENT  
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:  
Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.  
Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 <color> toner lowappears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge(s).  
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH  
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
219  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
6 Click Submit.  
Blocking junk faxes  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click the No Name Fax option.  
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.  
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.  
Solving option problems  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the printer.  
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not  
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or  
go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the option instruction sheet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
220  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED  
From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see “Updating available options  
Drawers  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Open the paper tray.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.  
5 Close the door.  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off. Wait 10 seconds. Turn the printer back on.  
Multipurpose feeder  
CHECK THE MULTIPURPOSE FEEDER  
Make sure the 650sheet duo drawer (multipurpose feeder) is installed properly.  
CLEAR ANY JAMS  
Clear any jams in the multipurpose feeder.  
CHECK THE POWER CORD CONNECTION  
Make sure:  
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
The outlet has power.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct position for the size loaded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
221  
CHECK FOR SERVICE MESSAGES  
If a service message appears, turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. If the  
error recurs, call for service.  
Memory card  
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Solving paper feed problems  
Paper frequently jams  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY  
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the  
multipurpose feeder.  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
Load paper from a fresh package.  
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared  
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then press  
.
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam  
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:  
1 Press  
.
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until General settingsappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Recoveryappears, and then press  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Troubleshooting  
222  
5 Press the arrow buttons until Jam Recoveryappears, and then press  
.
6 Press the arrow buttons until Onor Autoappears, and then press  
.
Solving print quality problems  
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not  
correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.  
Blank pages  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the print cartridge.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears, order a new print cartridge.  
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges  
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the  
software program.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
223  
Clipped images  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE GUIDES  
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Dark lines  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
The imaging kit may be defective.  
If Black and color imaging kit life warningorBlack imaging kit life warningappears,  
replace the imaging kit.  
Gray background  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING  
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:  
From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.  
For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
224  
Incorrect margins  
ABCD  
ABCD  
ABCD  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the defective toner cartridge.  
THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the imaging kit.  
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black  
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
225  
Paper curl  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
HAS THE PAPER ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY?  
Load paper from a fresh package.  
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Print irregularities  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
Load paper from a fresh package.  
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.  
THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the fuser.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
226  
Repeating defects  
REPEATING MARKS OCCUR MULTIPLE TIMES ON A PAGE  
Print the Print defects guide and match the defects to the marks on one of the vertical lines. Follow the instructions  
on the Print defects guide to determine the cause of the repeating defects.  
Skewed print  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.  
Print is too light  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CALIBRATE THE COLOR  
The printer automatically calibrates the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a cartridge is replaced, then  
you can calibrate the colors manually:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menuappears, and then press  
.
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
227  
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menuappears, and then press  
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjustappears, and then press  
Calibratingappears.  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the RGB Brightness setting is too light, or the RGB Contrast setting is too low.  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menuappears, and then press  
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Toner Darkness, RGB Brightness, or RGB Contrastappears, and then press  
.
6 Change the selected setting to a lower value, and then press  
.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
Load paper from a fresh package.  
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.  
MAKE SURE COLOR SAVER IS SET TO OFF  
Color Saver may be set to On.  
A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE LOW  
When 88 <color> Cartridge Lowappears, order a new cartridge.  
A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the imaging kit.  
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black  
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
228  
Print is too dark  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CALIBRATE THE COLOR  
The printer automatically calibrates the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a cartridge is replaced, then  
you can calibrate the colors manually:  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
.
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menuappears, and then press  
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjustappears, and then press  
Calibratingappears.  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the RGB Brightness setting is too dark, or the RGB Contrast setting is too high.  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menuappears, and then press  
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Toner Darkness, RGB Brightness, or RGB Contrastappears, and then  
press  
.
6 Change the selected setting to a lower value, and then press  
.
A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
229  
Solid color pages  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED  
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER  
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For  
more information, contact Customer Support.  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the imaging kit.  
Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black  
and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.  
IS THERE TONER IN THE PAPER PATH?  
Contact Customer Support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
230  
Toner rubs off  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING  
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the  
tray.  
Toner specks  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
231  
Transparency print quality is poor  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES  
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Uneven print density  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Replace the black and color imaging kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
232  
Solving color quality problems  
This section helps answer some basic colorrelated questions and describes how some of the features provided in the  
Quality menu can be used to solve typical color problems.  
Color misregistration  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Color has shifted outside of the appropriate area or has been superimposed over another color area. These are possible  
solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Remove and reinstall the toner cartridges.  
CALIBRATE THE COLOR  
The printer will automatically calibrate the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a toner cartridge is  
replaced, a manual alignment will need to be performed.  
1 From the printer control panel, press  
.
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settingsappears, and then press  
.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menuappears, and then press  
.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menuappears, and then press  
.
.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjustappears, and then press  
Calibratingappears.  
FAQ about color printing  
What is RGB color?  
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in  
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create  
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue  
needed to produce a certain color.  
What is CMYK color?  
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors  
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,  
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the  
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
233  
How is color specified in a document to be printed?  
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow  
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.  
How does the printer know what color to print?  
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The  
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of  
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the  
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text  
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.  
Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?  
The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver  
provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.  
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?  
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard  
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are  
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how  
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain colormatching problems, see the question, “How  
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”  
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?  
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be  
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust  
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make  
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for  
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of  
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and  
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.  
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?  
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain  
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector  
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print  
on the recommended type of color transparencies.  
What is manual color correction?  
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs userselected color conversion tables to process  
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no userdefined color conversion will be implemented.  
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how  
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).  
Notes:  
Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK  
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating  
system controls the adjustment of colors.  
The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred  
colors for the majority of documents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
234  
To manually apply a different color conversion table:  
1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.  
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the  
affected object type.  
Manual Color menu  
Object type  
Color conversion tables  
RGB Image  
RGB Text  
Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied  
to all incoming color formats.  
sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors  
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for  
printing photographs.  
RGB Graphics  
Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the  
colorsdisplayedon a computermonitor. Usesonlyblack toner tocreate  
all levels of neutral gray.  
sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB  
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business  
graphics.  
Off—No color correction is implemented.  
CMYK Image  
CMYK Text  
US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP  
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.  
Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color  
output.  
CMYK Graphics  
Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color  
correction setting.  
Off—No color correction is implemented.  
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?  
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color  
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiplepage printout consisting  
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table  
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box  
through the selected color conversion table.  
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color  
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For  
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the  
selected color conversion table for the particular object.  
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular colormatching problem depends on the Color Correction  
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the  
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color  
Correction setting is settoOff, thecolor is based on the print job information; and no color conversion isimplemented.  
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK  
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating  
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting  
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
235  
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?  
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed  
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a userdefined RGB or  
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment  
box.  
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP  
address in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Configuration.  
3 Click Color Samples.  
4 Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range.  
5 When the Detailed Options page appears, select a color conversion table.  
6 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.  
7 Enter an Increment value from 1–255.  
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.  
8 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set.  
Embedded Web Server does not open  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.  
CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS  
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https://instead of http://before the printer IP  
address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.  
Contacting Customer Support  
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the  
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.  
You need to know your printer model, type, and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top  
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.  
In the U.S. or Canada, call 18005396275. For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Notices  
236  
Notices  
Product information  
Product name:  
Lexmark X543, X544, X544n, X544dn, X544dw, X544dtn, X546dtn  
Machine type:  
7525, 4989  
Model(s):  
131, 133, 138, 332, 333, 336, 337, 352, 356, 382, 383, 386, 387, 392, 393, 396, 397  
Edition notice  
November 2012  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain  
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the  
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or  
the programs described may be made at any time.  
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make  
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to  
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,  
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification  
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the  
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.  
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.  
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.  
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
GOVERNMENT END USERS  
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.  
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.  
12.212or48C.F.R.227.7202,asapplicable. Consistentwith48C.F.R. 12.212or48C.F.R. 227.7202-1through227.7207-4,  
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.  
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users  
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notices  
237  
Trademarks  
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.  
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a  
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be  
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application  
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,  
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.  
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended  
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could  
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,  
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for  
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC  
regulations.  
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:  
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
740 West New Circle Road  
Lexington, KY 40550  
(859) 232–3000  
Modular component notice  
Wirelessequipped models contain the following modular component(s):  
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M04-001, FCC ID: IYLLEXM04001; IC:2376A-M04001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
238  
Noise emission levels  
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA  
Printing  
Ready  
48 dBA  
32 dBA  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive  
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European  
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the  
Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.  
Static sensitivity notice  
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the  
metal frame of the printer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
239  
ENERGY STAR  
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply  
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.  
Mercury statement  
This product contains mercury in the lamp (<5mg Hg). Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance:  
Temperature information  
Ambient temperature  
15.6C° – 32.2C°  
Shipping and storage temperature  
40.0C° – 60.0C°  
Laser notice  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser  
products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is  
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal  
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.  
Laser advisory label  
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
240  
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.  
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.  
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.  
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.  
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.  
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.  
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.  
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.  
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.  
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.  
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.  
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.  
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.  
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.  
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.  
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.  
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.  
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.  
- 当移除碳粉盒及互失效生看不的激光射,避免暴露在激光光束下。  
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。  
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。  
Power consumption  
Product power consumption  
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Mode  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
Printing  
Copying  
The product is generating hardcopy output from electronic inputs.  
540 W  
510 W  
The product is generating hardcopy output from hardcopy original  
documents.  
Scanning  
Ready  
The product is scanning hardcopy documents.  
60 W  
50 W  
24 W  
The product is waiting for a print job.  
Power Saver The product is in energysaving mode.  
Off  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0 W  
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous  
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Power Saver  
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the  
Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy bylowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity.  
The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the  
Power Saver Timeout.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
241  
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes):  
110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes  
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes.  
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of  
the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.  
Off mode  
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power  
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.  
Total energy usage  
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in  
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in  
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.  
Industry Canada compliance statement  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard  
ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements  
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.  
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council  
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a  
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone  
company.  
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the  
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is  
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your  
setup documentation for more information.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone  
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most  
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be  
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved  
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,  
the REN is shown separately on the label.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Notices  
242  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will  
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the  
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to  
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.  
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the  
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,  
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service  
commission, or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this  
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,  
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical  
surges.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic  
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or  
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time itis sent and an identification  
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending  
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or  
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is  
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of  
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of  
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical  
surges.  
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
243  
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada  
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :  
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés  
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement  
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur  
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.  
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,  
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un  
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans  
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques  
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire  
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région  
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.  
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.  
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network  
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal  
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection  
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above  
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted  
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network  
services.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.  
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom  
customers.  
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment  
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance  
to Telecom's specifications:  
There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual  
call initiation, and  
The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the  
beginning of the next call attempt.  
The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not  
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
South Africa telecommunications notice  
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
244  
Using this product in Switzerland  
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line  
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all  
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.  
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse  
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou  
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé  
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.  
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz  
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer  
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.  
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz  
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.  
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera  
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le  
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono  
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.  
European Community (EC) directives conformity  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and  
2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic  
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-  
related products.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.  
Regulatory notices for wireless products  
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,  
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
245  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory  
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for  
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited  
per regulations of Industry Canada.  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from  
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to  
licensing.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF  
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health  
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions  
suivantes :  
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles  
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.  
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est  
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.  
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement  
interdite.  
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur  
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.  
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.  
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre  
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au  
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme  
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
246  
Notice to users in the European Union  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,  
1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio  
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.  
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council  
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the  
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use  
within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign  
of energy-related products.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.  
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.  
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium  
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon  
request from the Authorized Representative.  
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.  
AT  
EL  
LI  
BE  
ES  
LT  
SE  
BG  
FI  
CH  
FR  
LV  
SK  
CY  
CZ  
DE  
IE  
DK  
IS  
EE  
IT  
HR  
MT  
TR  
HU  
NL  
UK  
LU  
SI  
NO  
PL  
PT  
RO  
Česky  
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními  
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
Dansk  
LexmarkInternational,Inc. erklærerherved, atdetteproduktoverholderdevæsentligekravogøvrige relevante  
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
Deutsch  
247  
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den  
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG  
befindet.  
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ  
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ  
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.  
English  
Español  
Eesti  
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the  
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos  
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.  
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ  
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.  
Suomi  
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten  
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.  
Français  
Magyar  
Íslenska  
Italiano  
Latviski  
Lietuvių  
Malti  
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences  
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ  
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.  
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar  
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti  
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām  
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas  
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.  
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet  
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.  
Nederlands Hierbijverklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat hettoestel ditproductinovereenstemmingismetdeessentiële  
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
Norsk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og  
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Polski  
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi  
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.  
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras  
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.  
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky  
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.  
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi  
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.  
Svenska  
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga  
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
248  
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,  
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS  
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY  
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-  
specific warranty information that came with your product.  
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from  
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”  
Limited warranty  
Lexmark warrants that this product:  
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts  
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship  
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair  
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).  
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product  
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the  
product.  
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user  
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that  
user.  
Limited warranty service  
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later  
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end  
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport  
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed  
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.  
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver  
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.  
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.  
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the  
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.  
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.  
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not  
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,  
liens, and encumbrances.  
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest  
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,  
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark  
products will not be impacted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
249  
Before youpresentthisproduct for warranty service, removeallprint cartridges, programs, data, andremovable storage  
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).  
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact  
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.  
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered  
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.  
Extent of limited warranty  
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints  
produced by any product.  
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:  
—Modification or unauthorized attachments  
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance  
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment  
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer  
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle  
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications  
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts  
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR  
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH  
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT  
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,  
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.  
Limitation of liability  
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or  
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual  
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.  
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product  
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real  
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.  
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any  
claim by you based on a third party claim.  
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its  
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended  
beneficiaries of this limitation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notices  
250  
Additional rights  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
Patent acknowledgment  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport  
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois  
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights(IPR) Disclosure ofCerticom Corp. atthe IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented  
in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security  
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the  
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS  
implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital  
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the  
product or service.  
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property  
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)  
implemented in the product or service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
251  
Index  
840.01 Scanner Disabled 175  
840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled 175  
88.yy <color> Cartridge is low 172  
88.yy Replace <color>  
Cartridge 172  
900–999 Service <message> 176  
canceling a print job  
from a computer 72  
card stock  
loading 54  
tips on using 68  
Check Config ID 162  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 208  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 213  
Numerics  
150 displayed 173  
200 Paper jam <area name> 173  
201.yy Paper jam <area name> 173  
202.yy Paper jam <area name> 173  
230.yy Paper jam <area name> 173  
235 Paper Jam Check Duplex 173  
24x Paper Jam Check Tray <x> 174  
250.yy Paper jam <area name> 174  
250sheet tray (standard)  
loading 50  
290–292 ADF Scanning Jams 174  
293 Paper Missing 174  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 174  
294 ADF Jam 175  
30.yy <color> cartridge missing 169  
31 Defective Imaging Kit 169  
34 Short paper 169  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 170  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 170  
cleaning  
exterior of the printer 203  
scanner glass 204  
clock battery 162  
Close door 163  
collating copies 79  
configuration information  
wireless network 34  
configurations  
A
Access USB after scan 162  
Access USB now 162  
Active NIC menu 132  
address book, email  
setting up 83  
printer 15  
connecting the printer to  
computer modem 97  
conservation settings  
EcoMode 45  
address book, fax  
ADF  
copying using 74  
attaching cables 30  
38 Memory Full 170  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 170  
40 <color> Invalid refill, change  
cartridge 170  
Quiet Mode 45  
conserving supplies 44  
contacting Customer Support 235  
control panel, printer 16  
copy quality  
adjusting 79  
improving 81  
Copy Settings menu 139  
copy troubleshooting  
copier does not respond 211  
partial document or photo  
poor copy quality 212  
poor scanned image quality 214  
scanner unit does not close 211  
copying  
50 PPDS Font Error 170  
B
51 Defective flash detected 170  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 171  
53 Unformatted flash detected 171  
54 Network <x> Software Error 171  
550sheet tray  
battery, clock 162  
buttons, printer control panel 16  
C
installing 29  
cables  
550sheet tray (optional)  
Ethernet 30  
Calibrating 162  
Call complete 162  
calling Customer Support 235  
Cancel not available 162  
Canceling 162  
canceling  
print job, from computer 72  
canceling a job  
loading 50  
56 Standard USB Port Disabled 171  
58 Input config error 172  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 171  
adjusting quality 79  
canceling a copy job 81  
collating copies 79  
58 Too many trays attached 172  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 172  
650sheet duo drawer  
enlarging 78  
from one size to another 76  
improving copy quality 81  
making a copy lighter or darker 78  
multiple pages on one sheet 80  
installing 29  
loading 53  
from the printer control panel 72  
82 Replace waste toner box 172  
82.yy Waste toner box missing 172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
252  
on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 77  
photos 75  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 80  
quick copy 74  
reducing 78  
selecting a tray 77  
to letterhead 76  
to transparencies 75  
using the ADF 74  
using the scanner glass 75  
Custom Scan Sizes menu 130  
Custom Types menu 129  
Cyan Low 163  
environmental settings 44  
EcoMode 45  
can send but not receive  
cannot send or receive a fax 216  
received fax has poor print  
quality 218  
Quiet Mode 45  
Ethernet network setup  
using Macintosh 40  
using Windows 40  
Ethernet networking  
Macintosh 40  
Windows 40  
Ethernet port 30  
faxing  
changing resolution 103  
choosing a fax connection 87  
connecting to a telephone 90  
connecting to an answering  
machine 90  
connecting to regional  
adapters 91  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 101  
creating shortcuts using the  
printer control panel 101  
fax setup 86  
forwarding faxes 106  
improving fax quality 106  
making a fax lighter or darker 103  
sending a fax at a scheduled  
time 103  
sending using the printer control  
setting the date and time 99  
setting the outgoing fax name and  
number 99  
turning daylight saving time on or  
using shortcuts 102  
using the address book 102  
viewing a fax log 104  
FCC notices 237, 241, 245  
features  
exterior of the printer  
cleaning 203  
email  
canceling 85  
notice of low supply level 207  
notice of paper jam 207  
notice of paper needed 207  
notice that different paper is  
needed 207  
D
date and time  
setting 99  
email function  
Default Source menu 122  
Defective <color> Cartridge 169  
Dialing 163  
directory list, printing 72  
display troubleshooting  
display is blank 208  
display shows only diamonds 208  
display, printer control panel 16  
distinctive ring service  
connecting to 90  
DO NOT TOUCH 163  
documents, printing  
from Macintosh computer 65  
from Windows 65  
setting up 82  
emailing  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 83  
setting up address book 83  
setting up email function 82  
using shortcut numbers 84  
using the address book 85  
using the keypad 83  
F
FAQ about color printing 232  
fax  
duplexing 77  
canceling 104  
options 105  
sending 100  
Fax complete 163  
fax connection  
Scan Center 111  
File corrupt 163  
finding more information about the  
printer 12  
Finishing menu 150  
flash drive 69  
Flash Drive menu 147  
flash drives  
file types 70  
flash memory card  
installing 27  
E
EcoMode setting 45  
Embedded Web Server 206  
administrator settings 206  
does not open 235  
networking settings 206  
setting up email alerts 207  
Embedded Web Server  
Administrator's Guide 206  
emission  
connecting the printer to the wall  
jack 88  
connecting to a distinctive ring  
service 90  
connecting to a DSL line 89  
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 89  
Fax failed 163  
fax quality, improving 106  
Fax Settings menu 141  
fax troubleshooting  
blocking junk faxes 219  
caller ID is not shown 215  
can receive but not send  
enlarging a copy 78  
envelopes  
loading 54, 56  
Flushing buffer 163  
font sample list  
printing 71  
forwarding faxes 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
253  
243 118  
250 119  
290 119  
Image 158  
Paper Loading 128  
Paper Size/Type 123  
Paper Texture 125  
PCL Emul 155  
G
green settings  
Quiet Mode 45  
guidelines  
L
card stock 68  
envelopes 67  
labels, paper 68  
letterhead 65  
transparencies 67  
labels, paper  
PDF 155  
tips on using 68  
LADP connection error 164  
letterhead  
copying to 76  
loading, manual feeder 65  
loading, trays 65  
tips on using 65  
light, indicator 16  
Line busy 164  
PictBridge 158  
PostScript 155  
Quality 152  
Reports 131  
Set Date and Time 159  
Settings 136  
Setup 150  
Supplies 122  
H
I
Image menu 158  
linking trays 48  
Imaging Kit 163  
imaging kits  
ordering 179  
Load <src> with <x> 164  
Load single sheet feeder with  
Wireless 134  
Menus disabled 165  
moving the printer 204, 205  
multiple pages on one sheet 80  
multipurpose feeder  
loading 54  
Incoming call 164  
Insert Tray <x> 164  
installing on a wireless network  
using Windows 35  
installing printer  
on wireless network 35  
installing printer on a network  
Ethernet networking 40  
installing printer on a wireless  
network  
using Macintosh 37  
installing printer software  
adding options 33  
installing printer software  
(Windows) 33  
Invalid Engine Code 164  
Invalid Network Code 164  
loading  
250sheet tray (standard) 50  
650sheet duo drawer 53  
card stock 54  
envelopes 54, 56  
letterhead in manual feeder 65  
letterhead in trays 65  
manual feeder 56  
multipurpose feeder 54  
transparencies 54  
N
Network menu 132  
network setup page 32  
Networking Guide 206  
No analog phone line 165  
No answer 165  
No dial tone 165  
M
No recognized file types 165  
noise emission levels 238  
Magenta Low 163  
Maintenance 165  
manual feeder  
loading 56  
memory card  
installing 25  
O
troubleshooting 221  
Memory full, cannot send  
menu settings pages, printing 32  
menus  
Active NIC 132  
Copy Settings 139  
Custom Scan Sizes 130  
Custom Types 129  
Default Source 122  
diagram of 121  
Fax Settings 141  
Finishing 150  
options  
J
550sheet tray 29  
650sheet duo drawer 29  
fax 105  
flash memory card 27  
internal 22  
memory card 25  
memory cards 22  
scan to computer 111  
updating in printer driver 33  
ordering  
imaging kits 179  
toner cartridges 178  
waste toner bottle 179  
jams  
avoiding 113  
locating doors and trays 114  
locations 114  
numbers 114  
jams, clearing  
200 115  
201 115  
202 116  
230 118  
235 118  
242 118  
Flash Drive 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
254  
replacing the waste toner  
bottle 180  
print quality test pages, printing 72  
print quality troubleshooting  
blank pages 222  
printer information  
where to find 12  
printer messages  
150 displayed 173  
200 Paper jam <area name> 173  
201.yy Paper jam <area  
202.yy Paper jam <area  
230.yy Paper jam <area  
235 Paper Jam Check Duplex 173  
24x Paper Jam Check Tray <x> 174  
250.yy Paper jam <area  
290–292 ADF Scanning Jams 174  
293 Paper Missing 174  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 174  
294 ADF Jam 175  
30.yy <color> cartridge  
missing 169  
31 Defective Imaging Kit 169  
34 Short paper 169  
P
paper  
capacities 64  
characteristics 58  
letterhead 59  
preprinted forms 59  
recycled 43  
selecting 59  
selecting weight 127  
setting size 49  
setting type 49  
storing 60  
unacceptable 43, 59  
Universal Paper Size 130  
Universal size setting 49  
paper feed troubleshooting  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 221  
characters have jagged edges 222  
clipped images 223  
color misregistration 232  
dark lines 223  
gray background 223  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line 224  
poor transparency quality 231  
print irregularities 225  
print is too dark 228  
print is too light 226  
repeating defects 226  
skewed print 226  
solid color pages 229  
toner fog or background  
shading 229  
toner rubs off 230  
toner specks 230  
uneven print density 231  
print troubleshooting  
error reading USB drive 208  
incorrect margins 224  
incorrect or strange characters  
print 210  
jammed page does not  
reprint 221  
job prints from wrong tray 210  
job prints on wrong paper 210  
job takes longer than  
expected 209  
paper jams  
avoiding 113  
Paper Loading menu 128  
Paper Size/Type menu 123  
paper sizes  
supported by the printer 60  
Paper Texture menu 125  
paper types  
supported by printer 61  
where to load 61  
paper types and weights  
supported by the printer 62  
PC Kit Life Warning 165  
PCL Emul menu 155  
PDF menu 155  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 170  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 170  
38 Memory Full 170  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 170  
40 <color> Invalid refill, change  
cartridge 170  
50 PPDS Font Error 170  
51 Defective flash detected 170  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 171  
53 Unformatted flash  
detected 171  
54 Network <x> Software  
56 Standard USB Port  
Disabled 171  
58 Input config error 172  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 171  
58 Too many trays attached 172  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 172  
82 Replace waste toner  
bottle 180  
82 Replace waste toner box 172  
82.yy Waste toner box  
missing 172  
Phone in Use 166  
photos  
copying 75  
jobs do not print 209  
Large jobs do not collate 210  
multiplelanguage PDFs do not  
print 208  
PictBridge menu 158  
PictBridgeenabled printing  
photos 71  
Picture too large 166  
PostScript menu 155  
Power Saver 166  
adjusting 46  
print job  
canceling from the printer control  
canceling, from computer 72  
print quality  
cleaning the scanner glass 204  
replacing developer unit 197  
replacing imaging kits 183, 189  
paper curl 225  
paper frequently jams 221  
tray linking does not work 210  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 211  
printer  
configurations 15  
minimum clearances 13  
models 15  
selecting a location 13  
shipping 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
255  
840.01 Scanner Disabled 175  
840.02 Scanner Auto  
Disabled 175  
88 Replace <color> Cartridge 195  
88.yy <color> Cartridge is low 172  
88.yy Replace <color>  
Cartridge 172  
900–999 Service <message> 176  
940.01 175  
No answer 165  
No dial tone 165  
No recognized file types 165  
PC Kit Life Warning 165  
Phone in Use 166  
Picture too large 166  
Power Saver 166  
Printing error 166  
Programming Code 166  
Reading data 166  
Reading error 166  
printer software, installing  
(Windows) 33  
printing  
directory list 72  
flash drives 70  
font sample list 71  
from flash drive 69  
from Macintosh computer 65  
from Windows 65  
menu settings pages 32  
network setup page 32  
photos 71  
940.02 176  
941.01 175  
941.02 176  
942.01 175  
942.02 176  
943.01 176  
943.02 176  
Access USB after scan 162  
Access USB now 162  
Calibrating 162  
Call complete 162  
Cancel not available 162  
Canceling 162  
Check Config ID 162  
clock battery 162  
Close door 163  
Cyan Low 163  
Defective <color> Cartridge 169  
Dialing 163  
DO NOT TOUCH 163  
Fax complete 163  
Fax failed 163  
File corrupt 163  
Flushing buffer 163  
Hex Trace 163  
Receiving pXX 167  
Reload printed pages in Tray  
Remote Management Active 167  
Remove originals from the  
scanner ADF 167  
Remove packaging material 167  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 167  
Replace <color> cartridge 167  
Replace Black Imaging Kit 183  
Replace Color Imaging Kit 189  
Replace PC Kit 167  
Replace Unsupported <color>  
Cartridge 169  
Scan Document Too Long 167  
Scan to USB failed 167  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 168  
Sending pXX 168  
Standard Exit Bin Full 168  
Tray <x> Empty 168  
print quality test pages 72  
Printing error 166  
Programming Code 166  
publications  
where to find 12  
Q
Quality menu 152  
Quiet Mode 45  
R
Reading data 166  
Reading error 166  
Ready 166  
Receiving pXX 167  
recycled paper  
using 43  
recycling 239  
Lexmark packaging 47  
Lexmark products 47  
toner cartridges 47  
WEEE statement 238  
reducing a copy 78  
reducing noise 45  
Reload printed pages in Tray  
Remote Management Active 167  
Remove originals from the scanner  
Remove packaging material 167  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 167  
Replace <color> cartridge 167  
Replace PC Kit 167  
Replace Unsupported <color>  
Cartridge 169  
reports  
viewing 207  
Tray <x> Missing 168  
Unsupported Mode 168  
Unsupported USB device, please  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
USB drive disabled 169  
Use camera controls to print 169  
Waiting 169  
Waiting, too many events 169  
Yellow Low 163  
printer options troubleshooting  
drawers 220  
memory card 221  
multipurpose feeder 220  
option not working 219  
printer problems, solving basic 208  
Imaging Kit 163  
Incoming call 164  
Insert Tray <x> 164  
Invalid Engine Code 164  
Invalid Network Code 164  
LADP connection error 164  
Line busy 164  
Load <src> with <x> 164  
Load single sheet feeder with  
Magenta Low 163  
Maintenance 165  
Memory full, cannot send  
Menus disabled 165  
No analog phone line 165  
Reports menu 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
256  
resolution, fax  
changing 103  
restoring factory default  
settings 206  
on an Ethernet network (Windows  
contacting Customer Support 235  
FAQ about color printing 232  
solving basic printer  
Settings menu 136  
Setup menu 150  
shipping the printer 205  
shortcuts, creating  
email 83  
problems 208  
troubleshooting, copy  
copier does not respond 211  
partial document or photo  
poor copy quality 212  
poor scanned image quality 214  
scanner unit does not close 211  
troubleshooting, display  
display is blank 208  
display shows only diamonds 208  
troubleshooting, fax  
blocking junk faxes 219  
caller ID is not shown 215  
can receive but not send  
can send but not receive  
cannot send or receive a fax 216  
received fax has poor print  
quality 218  
troubleshooting, paper feed  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 221  
troubleshooting, print  
error reading USB drive 208  
incorrect margins 224  
incorrect or strange characters  
print 210  
S
safety information 10, 11  
Scan Center features 111  
Scan Document Too Long 167  
scan quality, improving 111  
scan to computer  
fax destination 101  
FTP destination 108  
Standard Exit Bin Full 168  
standard tray  
loading 50  
status of supplies, checking 177  
storing  
supplies 177  
supplies  
conserving 44  
status of 177  
storing 177  
Supplies menu 122  
supplies, ordering  
imaging kits 179  
toner cartridges 178  
waste toner bottle 179  
system board  
options 111  
Scan to USB failed 167  
scan troubleshooting  
cannot scan from a computer 215  
partial document or photo  
scan was not successful 214  
scanner unit does not close 211  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 214  
ScanBack Utility  
using the ScanBack Utility 112  
scanner  
Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) 16  
functions 15  
scanner glass 16  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 168  
scanner glass  
cleaning 204  
copying using 75  
scanning to a computer 109  
improving scan quality 111  
scanning to a USB flash memory  
device 110  
scanning to an FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the  
computer 108  
using shortcut numbers 108  
using the keypad 107  
sending a fax 100  
accessing 23  
T
telecommunication  
toner cartridges  
ordering 178  
jammed page does not  
reprint 221  
job prints from wrong tray 210  
job prints on wrong paper 210  
job takes longer than  
expected 209  
jobs do not print 209  
Large jobs do not collate 210  
multiplelanguage PDFs do not  
print 208  
recycling 47  
replacing 195  
transparencies  
copying to 75  
loading 54  
tips on using 67  
Tray <x> Missing 168  
tray linking 48  
tray unlinking 48  
trays  
linking 48  
unlinking 48  
troubleshooting  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 208  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 213  
paper curl 225  
Sending pXX 168  
Set Date and TIme menu 159  
setting  
Active NIC 132  
paper size 49  
paper frequently jams 221  
tray linking does not work 210  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 211  
troubleshooting, print quality  
blank pages 222  
characters have jagged edges 222  
clipped images 223  
color misregistration 232  
paper type 49  
Universal Paper Size 49  
setting up the printer  
on an Ethernet network  
(Macintosh only) 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
257  
dark lines 223  
W
gray background 223  
light colored line, white line, or  
incorrectly colored line 224  
poor transparency quality 231  
print irregularities 225  
print is too dark 228  
print is too light 226  
repeating defects 226  
skewed print 226  
solid color pages 229  
toner fog or background  
shading 229  
toner rubs off 230  
toner specks 230  
Waiting 169  
Waiting, too many events 169  
waste toner bottle  
ordering 179  
replacing 180  
Wireless menu 134  
wireless network  
configuration information 34  
installation, using Macintosh 37  
installation, using Windows 35  
wireless network setup  
in Windows 35  
wireless printer setup  
in Macintosh 37  
uneven print density 231  
troubleshooting, printer options  
drawers 220  
Y
Yellow Low 163  
memory card 221  
multipurpose feeder 220  
option not working 219  
troubleshooting, scan  
cannot scan from a computer 215  
partial document or photo  
scan was not successful 214  
scanner unit does not close 211  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 214  
U
Universal Paper Size 130  
setting 49  
Universal Setup menu 130  
unlinking trays 48  
Unsupported Mode 168  
Unsupported USB device, please  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
updating options in printer  
driver 33  
USB drive disabled 169  
USB menu 134  
USB port 30  
Use camera controls to print 169  
Utilities menu 154  
V
viewing  
reports 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lasko Electric Heater 5588 User Manual
Lindy TV Converter Box MT RJ User Manual
Linear Automobile Electronics AKR 1 User Manual
LumiSource Video Game Furniture A44 User Manual
Makita Saw 4326 User Manual
Marshall Amplification Stereo Amplifier EL84 20 20 User Manual
MaxTech Computer Monitor XT4888 User Manual
Melissa Microwave Oven 753 121 User Manual
Memorex TV DVD Combo MLTD2622 User Manual
Meyer Sound Laptop SIM 3 User Manual